advertisement
©YAMAHA
XF50W
SERVICE MANUAL
LIT-11616-20-58 3B3-F8197-10
EAS00000
XF50W 2006
SERVICE MANUAL
©2006 by Yamaha Motor Taiwan Co., Ltd.
First edition, September 2006
All rights reserved.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use without the written permission of
Yamaha Motor Taiwan Co., Ltd. is expressly prohibited.
Printed in U.S.A.
LIT-11616-20-58
Q w c C
NOTE:
EAS00002
NOTICE
This manual was produced by the Yamaha Motor Taiwan Company, Ltd. primarily for use by Yamaha dealers and their qualified mechanics. It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in one manual. Therefore, anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamaha vehicles should have a basic understanding of mechanics and the techniques to repair these types of vehicles. Repair and maintenance work attempted by anyone without this knowledge is likely to render the vehicle unsafe and unfit for use.
Yamaha Motor Taiwan Company, Ltd. is continually striving to improve all of its models. Modifications and significant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha dealers and will appear in future editions of this manual where applicable.
NOTE:
Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
EAS00005
IMPORTANT MANUAL INFORMATION
Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following.
The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR
SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to the scooter operator, a bystander or a person checking or repairing the scooter.
A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damage to the scooter.
A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.
EAS00007
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is intended as a handy, easy-to-read reference book for the mechanic. Comprehensive explanations of all installation, removal, disassembly, assembly, repair and check procedures are laid out with the individual steps in sequential order.
1 The manual is divided into chapters. An abbreviation and symbol in the upper right corner of each page indicate the current chapter. Refer to “SYMBOLS”.
2 Each chapter is divided into sections. The current section title is shown at the top of each page, except in Chapter 3 (“PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS”), where the sub-section title(s) appears.
3 Sub-section titles appear in smaller print than the section title.
4 To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of each removal and disassembly section.
5 Numbers are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A circled number indicates a disassembly step.
6 Symbols indicate parts to be lubricated or replaced.Refer to “SYMBOLS”.
7 A job instruction chart accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names of parts, notes in jobs, etc.
8 Jobs requiring more information (such as special tools and technical data) are described sequentially.
6 2
4
5
7 Order
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
Job/Part
Removing the cylinder and piston
Cylinder head
Timing chain guide(exhaust side)
Cylinder
Dowel pin
Cylinder gasket
Piston pin clip
Piston pin
Piston
Piston ring set
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”CYLINDER HEAD”.
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
Refer to”REMOVING THE CYLINDER
AND PISTON” and “INSTALLING THE
PISTON AND CYLINDER”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-31
CYLINDER AND PISTON ENG W
REMOVING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON
1. Remove:
8piston pin clip 1
8piston pin 2
8piston 3 c C
Do not use a hammer to drive the piston pin out.
NOTE:
8 Before removing the piston pin clip, cover the crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent the piston pin clip from falling into the crankcase.
8 Before removing the piston pin, deburr the piston pin clip’s groove and the piston’s pin bore area. If both areas are deburred and the piston pin is still difficult to remove, remove it with the piston pin puller set4.
Piston pin puller set
90890-01304(YU-01304)
3
8
2. Remove:
8top ring
82nd ring
8oil ring
When removing a piston ring, open the end gap with your fingers and lift the other side of the ring over the piston crown.
5-32
1 2
SPEC
3
5
4
CHK i g l
ADJ I ^ < \
6
CHAS (3^3^)
7
ENG
% m
8
COOL j K
FI Ifl ELEC +i q
9 0
TRBL f}
SHTGl • w
*Q
© /•; ® H\
EAS00008
SYMBOLS
The following symbols are not relevant to every vehicle.
Symbols 1 to 9 indicate the subject of each chapter.
1 General information
2 Specifications
3 Periodic checks and adjustments
4 Chassis
5 Engine
6 Cooling system
7 Fuel injection system
8 Electrical system
9 Troubleshooting
Symbols 0 to u indicate the following.
0 Serviceable with engine mounted q Filling fluid w Lubricant e Special tool r Tightening torque t Wear limit, clearance y Engine speed u Electrical data t
B y u m
I o I p I
^4J ^Gj ^Mj
M
New
Symbols i to d in the exploded diagrams indicate the types of lubricants and lubrication points. i Engine oil o Gear oil p Molybdenum-disulfide oil a Wheel-bearing grease s Lithium-soap- based grease d Molybdenum-disulfide grease
Symbols f to g in the exploded diagrams indicate the following. f Apply locking agent (LOCTITE
®
) g Replace the part
EAS00010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
PERIODIC CHECKS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
SHTG
GEN j y *
INFO \<^®
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOOTER IDENTIFICATION 1-1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 1-1
MODEL LABEL 1-1
FEATURES 1-2
OUTLINE OF THE FI SYSTEM 1-2
FI SYSTEM 1-3
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1-4
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY 1-4
REPLACEMENT PARTS 1-4
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS 1-4
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS 1-5
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS 1-5
CIRCLIPS 1-5
EQUIPMENT PREPARATION 1-6
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS 1-7
SPECIAL TOOLS 1-8
SCOOTER IDENTIFICATION
GEN
INFO # ^
EAS00015
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOOTER IDENTIFICATION
EAS00017
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number 1 is stamped into the frame.
EAS00018
MODEL LABEL
The model label 1 is affixed to the frame trunk.
This information will be needed to order spare parts.
1-1
FEATURES
EAS00896
FEATURES
OUTLINE OF THE FI SYSTEM
The main function of a fuel supply system is to provide fuel to the combustion chamber at the optimum air-fuel ratio in accordance with the engine operating conditions and the atmospheric temperature. In the conventional carburetor system, the air-fuel ratio of the mixture that is supplied to the combustion chamber is created by the volume of the intake air and the fuel that is metered by the jet used in the respective carburetor.
Despite the same volume of intake air, the fuel volume requirement varies by the engine operating conditions, such as acceleration, deceleration, or operation under a heavy load. Carburetors that meter the fuel through the use of jets have been provided with various auxiliary devices, so that an optimum air-fuel ratio can be achieved to accommodate the constant changes in the operating conditions of the engine.
As the requirements for the engine to deliver more performance and cleaner exhaust gases increase, it becomes necessary to control the air-fuel ratio in a more precise and finely tuned manner.
To accommodate this need, this model has adopted an electronically controlled fuel injection(FI) system, in place of the conventional carburetor system. This system can achieve an optimum airfuel ratio required by the engine at all times by using a microprocessor that regulates the fuel injection volume according to the engine operating conditions detected by various sensors.
The adoption of the FI system has resulted in a highly precise fuel supply, improved engine response, better fuel economy, and reduced exhaust emissions.
1 ECU
2 Engine trouble warning light
3 Lean angle cut-off switch
4 Fuel hose
5 Ignition coil
6 Fuel injector
7 Intake air pressure sensor
8 ISC(idle speed control) valve
9 Intake air temperature sensor
1-2
0 Battery q Air filter case w Catalytic converter e Crankshaft position sensor r Coolant temperature sensor t Spark plug y Fuel tank u Fuel pump i Throttle position sensor
FEATURES
EAS00897
FI SYSTEM
The fuel pump delivers fuel to the fuel injector via the fuel filter. The pressure regulator maintains the fuel pressure that is applied to the fuel injector at only 250 kPa (2.5 kg/cm
2
, 35.6 psi). Accordingly, when the energizing signal from the ECU energizes the fuel injector, the fuel passage opens, causing the fuel to be injected into the intake manifold only during the time the passage remains open.
Therefore, the longer the length of time the fuel injector is energized (injection duration), the greater the volume of fuel that is supplied. Conversely, the shorter the length of time the fuel injector is energized (injection duration), the lesser the volume of fuel that is supplied.
The injection duration and the injection timing are controlled by the ECU. Signals that are input from the crankshaft position sensor, intake air pressure sensor, intake temperature sensor and engine temperature sensor enable the ECU to determine the injection duration. The injection timing is determined through the signals from the crankshaft position sensor. As a result, the volume of fuel that is required by the engine can be supplied at all times in accordance with the driving conditions.
1 Fuel pump
2 Fuel injector
3 Ignition coil
4 ECU
5 Catalytic converter
6 Coolant temperature sensor
7 Crankshaft position sensor
8 Intake air pressure sensor
9 Throttle body assembly
0 Intake air temperature sensor
1-3 q Air filter case w ISC (idle speed control) valve e Throttle position sensor
A Fuel system
B Air system
C Control system
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
EAS00020
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISAS-
SEMBLY
1. Before removal and disassembly, remove all dirt, mud, dust and foreign material.
2. Use only the proper tools and cleaning equipment.
Refer to the “SPECIAL TOOLS”.
3. When disassembling, always keep mated parts together. This includes gears, cylinders, pistons and other parts that have been
“mated” through normal wear. Mated parts must always be reused or replaced as an assembly.
4. During disassembly, clean all of the parts and place them in trays in the order of disassembly. This will speed up assembly and allow for the correct installation of all parts.
5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.
1 "^N
^M
EAS00021
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all replacements. Use oil and grease recommended by
Yamaha for all lubrication jobs. Other brands may be similar in function and appearance, but inferior in quality.
EAS00022
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS
1. When overhauling the engine, replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. All gasket surfaces, oil seal lips and O-rings must be cleaned.
2. During reassembly, properly oil all mating parts and bearings and lubricate the oil seal lips with grease.
1-4
^
®-^>
//////K
/////©//
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
EAS00023
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER
PINS
After removal, replace all lock washers/plates
1 and cotter pins. After the bolt or nut has been tightened to specification, bend the lock tabs along a flat of the bolt or nut.
EAS00024
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS
Install bearings and oil seals so that the manufacturer’s marks or numbers are visible.
When installing oil seals, lubricate the oil seal lips with a light coat of lithium-soap-based grease. Oil bearings liberally when installing, if appropriate.
1 Oil seal c C
Do not spin the bearing with compressed air because this will damage the bearing surfaces.
1 Bearing
EAS00025
CIRCLIPS
Before reassembly, check all circlips carefully and replace damaged or distorted circlips. Always replace piston pin clips after one use. When installing a circlip 1 , make sure the sharp-edged corner 2 is positioned opposite the thrust 3 that the circlip receives.
4 Shaft
1-5
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
GEN
INFO # ^
EAS00021
EQUIPMENT PREPARATION
Push Rivet (Push type)
Assembly status of the push rivet(push type).
(^E
<D
Dissembling
1. Press center p i n 1 inward to release the lock.
2. Remove the push rivet main b o d y 2 .
Vo.
; * *
Assembling
1. Restore the center pin, replace the push rivet main body.
2. Push in the center pin until leveling off with the surface position of the push rivet main body.
1-6
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
EAS00026
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
Check the leads, couplers, and connectors for stains, rust, moisture, etc.
1. Disconnect:
8lead
8coupler
8connector
2. Check:
• lead
• coupler
• connector
Moisture -» Dry with an air blower.
Rust/stains -» Connect and disconnect several times.
3. Check:
• all connections
Loose connection -» Connect properly.
NOTE:
If the pin © on the terminal is flattened, bend it up.
^ Y v »
^
V ff \°
-V 1 +
? ^ ^ ?
4. Connect:
8lead
8coupler
8connector
NOTE:
Make sure all connections are tight.
1-7
5. Check:
8continuity
(with the pocket tester) p* Pocket tester
90890-03112(YU-03112-C)
NOTE:
8 If there is no continuity, clean the terminals.
8 When checking the wire harness, perform steps (1) to (3).
8 As a quick remedy, use a contact revitalizer available at most part stores.
SPECIAL TOOLS
EAS00027
SPECIAL TOOLS
The following special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Use only the appropriate special tools as this will help prevent damage caused by the use of inappropriate tools or improvised techniques. Special tools, part numbers or both may differ depending on the country.
When placing an order, refer to the list provided below to avoid any mistakes.
NOTE:
8 For U.S.A. and Canada, use part number starting with “YM-”, “YU-”, or “ACC-”.
8 For others, use part number starting with “90890-”.
Tool NO.
90890-01052
Tool name / Function
Meter gear bush tool
Illustration
90890-01085
YU-01083-2
90890-01084
YU-01083-3
90890-01235
YU-01235
90890-01268
YU-01268
90890-01304
YU-01304
This tool is used when removing or installing the meter gear.
Slide hammer bolt(8mm)1
Weight 2
These tools are needed to remove the camshaft.
Rotor holding tool
This tool is used to hold the primary fixed sheave and secondary sheave assembly.
Ring nut wrench
This tool is used to loosen and tighten the exhaust and steering ring nut.
Piston pin puller set
^ 2
90890-01337
YM-33285
YM-33285-6
90890-01325
YU-24460-01
90890-01352
YU-33984
90890-01367
YM-A9409-7
90890-01400
YM-A9409-3
This tool is used to remove the piston pin.
Clutch spring holder
These tool are used for removing the nut with holding the compression spring.
Radiator cap tester 1
Radiator cap tester adapter 2
This tester and its adapter are needed for checking the cooling system.
Fork seal driver weight 1
Fork seal driver attachment 2
This tool is used when installing the fork seal.
1
1
2
2
1-8
Tool NO.
90890-01384
YM-33299
90890-01403
YU-A9472
90890-01444
YM-A9409-7
90890-01468
YU-33270-B
90890-01493
90890-01701
YS-01880-A
90890-03079
YM-34483
90890-03081
YU-33223
90890-03112
YU-03112-C
90890-03174
90890-03141
YU-03141
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration Tool name / Function
Oil seal guide
This tool is used for protecting the oil seal lip when installing the secondary sliding sheave.
Steering nut wrench
This tool is used to loosen and tighten the steering ring nut.
Steering nut wrench(45mm)
This tool is used to loosen and tighten the upper bearing inner race.
Flywheel puller set
This tool is used to remove the AC magneto rotor.
Socket wrench(39mm)
This tool is used when removing or installing the secondary sheave nut.
Sheave holder
This tool is used for holding the secondary sheave.
Thickness gauge
This tool is used to measure the valve cleanance.
Compression gauge
This tool is used to measure the engine compression.
Pocket tester
This instrument is invaluable for checking the electrical system.
Digital circuit tester
This instrument is invaluable for checking the electrical system.
1-9
Tool NO.
90890-03141
YU-03141
90890-03182
YU-03182
90890-04101
90890-04058
YM-04058
90890-04145
90890-04019
YM-04019
90890-04148
YM-04148
90890-06760
Tool name / Function
Timing light
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
This tool is used to check the ignition timing.
FI diagnostic tool
Execute CO adjustment, confirm fault Code, self diagnosis tool
Valve lapper
This tool is needed to remove and install the valve lifters.
Middle driven shaft bearing driver 1
Mechanical seal installer 2
There tools are used to install the water pump seal.
Valve spring compressor
Compressor adapter(Ø16.5mm)
These tools are used when removing or installing the valve and the valve spring.
Digital tachometer
2
90890-06754
YM-34487
90890-04111
YM-04111
90890-04112
YM-04112
90890-04113
YM-04113
This tool is needed for detecting engine rpm.
Ignition checker
This tool is used to check the ignition system components.
Valve guide remover(4.0mm)
This tool is used to remove or install the valve guides.
Valve guide installer(4.0mm)
This tool is used to install the valve guides.
Valve guide remover(4.0mm)
This tool is used to rebore the new valve guides.
1-10
Tool NO.
90890-01326
YM-01326
90890-01294
YM-01300-1
90890-03153
YU-03153
SPECIAL TOOLS
GEN
INFO # ^
Tool name / Function
T-handle 1
Damper rid holder 2
These tools are used to hold the damper rod when removing or installing the damper rod.
Illustration
© (D
Pressure gauge
90890-03181
This tool is used to measure fuel pressure.
Fuel pressure adapter
90890-85505
ACC-11001-05-01
This tool is used to measure fuel pressure.
Yamaha bond NO.1215
Sealant (Quick Gasket
®
)
This sealamt (bond) is used on crankcase mating surfaces(e.g., crankcase mating surfaces).
1-11
SPEC 0 *
CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 2-1
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS 2-2
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS 2-12
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2-15
CONVERTION TABLE / GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICA-
TIONS 2-18
TIGHTENING TORQUES 2-19
ENGINE 2-19
CHASSIS 2-21
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES 2-23
ENGINE 2-23
CHASSIS 2-25
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 2-26
CABLE ROUTING 2-29
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Model code
3B32(USA)
3B33(CAN)
…
…
Dimensions
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Seat height
Wheelbase
Minimum ground clearance
Minimum turning radius
Weight
Wet(without oil and a full fuel tank)
Dry(without oil and fuel)
Maximun load(total of cargo, rider, passenger, and accessories)
1905mm(75.00in)
685mm(26.97in)
1045mm(41.14in)
735mm(28.94in)
1280mm(50.39in)
115mm(4.53in)
2000mm(78.74in)
90kg(198lb)
85kg(187lb)
175kg(386lb)
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
2-1
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Item Standard
Engine
Engine type
Displacement
Cylinder arrangement
Bore×stroke
Compression ratio
Engine idle speed
Liquid-cooled, 4-stroke, SOHC …
0.049L(49cm³, 2.99cu-in)
Forward inclined single cylinder …
38.0×43.5mm(1.496×1.713in)
12:1
2000~2200r/min
…
…
…
…
Vacuum pressure at engine idle speed 34.7kPa(260mmHg,10.24inHg) …
Standard compression pressure(at sea level) 1450kPa(14.5kg/cm
2
) … at 700r/min
Fuel
Recommended fuel Unleaded gasoline only(USA) …
Regular unleaded gasoline … only(CAN)
Fuel tank capacity
Total 4.5L(0.98 Imp gal, 1.18 US gal) …
Engine oil
Lubrication system
Recommended oil
Wet sump
YAMALUBE4, SAE10W30 or SAE20W40
API service SG type or higher
JASO stand MA
…
…
Quantity
Periodic oil change …
Total amount
0.73~0.83L(0.67~0.76 Imp qt,
0.80~0.90 US qt)
0.80~0.90L(0.74~0.83 Imp qt,
0.87~0.98 US qt)
…
Final gear oil
Recommended oil
Periodic oil change
Total amount
SAE10W30 hypoid gear oil
0.09~0.11L(0.08~0.10 Imp qt,
0.10~0.12 US qt)
0.11~0.13L(0.10~0.12 Imp qt,
0.12~0.14 US qt)
…
…
…
Oil filter
Oil filter type Wire mesh …
Limit
2-2
Item
Oil pump
Oil pump type
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
Outer rotor to pump housing clearance
Oil pump housing to inner rotor and outer rotor clearance
Cooling system
Radiator capacity
Radiator cap opening pressure
Trochoid
0.15mm(0.006in) or less
…
0.23mm
(0.009in)
0.13~0.18mm(0.005~0.007in) 0.25mm
(0.010in)
0.07~0.12mm(0.003~0.005in) 0.19mm
(0.008in)
0.26L(0.23 Imp gal, 0.28 US gal) …
107.9~137.3kPa …
(1.1~1.4kg/cm
2
, 15.6~19.9psi)
1.1kPa(0.01kg/cm
2
, 0.16psi) … Valve relief pressure
Radiator core
Width
Height
Depth
Coolant reservoir
Capacity(up to the maximum level mark)
<From low to full level>
Water pump
Water pump type
127.4mm(5.016in)
87mm(3.425in)
16mm(0.630in)
…
…
…
0.25L(0.22 Imp gal, 0.27 US gal) …
0.15L(0.13 Imp gal, 0.16 US gal) …
…
Max. impeller shaft tilt
Single-suction centrifugal pump
…
Electric and kick starter
0.15mm
(0.0059in)
… Starting system type
Electric fuel injection
Type
Manufacturer
Spark plug
Model(manufacturer)×quantity
Spark plug gap
Cylinder head
Volume
Maximum warpage
, i i ,
3B3
AISAN
CR7E(NGK)×1
0.7~0.8mm(0.028~0.031in)
…
…
…
…
3.1~3.5cm³(0.19~0.21cu-in) …
… 0.05mm
(0.0020in)
>
>
1
F
' •
2-3
Item
Camshaft
Drive system
Intake camshaft lobe dimensions
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
Chain drive(left) …
B
Measurement A
Measurement B
Exhaust camshaft lobe dimensions
Measurement A
Measurement B
•^
6 A
B •
Maximum camshaft runout
30.158~30.258mm
(1.1873~1.1913in)
25.082~25.182mm
(0.9875~0.9914in)
30.158~30.258mm
(1.1873~1.1913in)
25.020~25.120mm
(0.9850~0.9890in)
…
30.058mm
(1.1834in)
24.982mm
(0.9835in)
30.058mm
(1.1834in)
24.920mm
(0.9811in)
0.03mm
(0.0012in)
2-4
Item
Timing chain
Model/number of links
Tensioning system
Valve, valve seats, valve guides
Valve clearance(cold)
Intake
Exhaust
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
Morse 92RH2005/82
Automatic
0.10~0.16mm
(0.0039~0.0063in)
0.18~0.24mm
(0.0071~0.0094in)
…
…
…
…
Valve dimensions y v V V B r \
Head Diameter Face Width
Valve head diameter A
Intake
Exhaust
Valve face width B
Intake
Exhaust
Valve seat width C
Intake
Exhaust
Valve margin thickness D
Intake
Exhaust
Valve stem diameter
Intake
Exhaust
Valve guide inside diameter
Intake
Exhaust
\ .
\ . C
T\
15.4~15.6mm
(0.6063~0.6142in)
16.4~16.6mm
(0.6457~0.6535in)
1.48~2.19mm
(0.0583~0.0862in)
1.48~2.19mm
(0.0583~0.0862in)
0.9~1.1mm
(0.0354~0.0433in)
0.9~1.1mm
(0.0354~0.0433in)
0.70mm(0.0276in)
0.70mm(0.0276in)
3.975~3.990mm
(0.1565~0.1571in)
3.975~3.990mm
(0.1565~0.1571in)
4.000~4.012mm
(0.1575~0.1580in)
4.000~4.012mm
(0.1575~0.1580in)
…
…
…
…
J D
1.6mm
(0.0630in)
1.6mm
(0.0630in)
…
…
3.945mm
(0.1553in)
3.930mm
(0.1547in)
4.050mm
(0.1594in)
4.050mm
(0.1594in)
2-5
Item
Valve stem to valve guide clearance
Intake
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
Exhaust
Valve stem runout
0.010~0.037mm
(0.0004~0.0015in)
0.025~0.052mm
(0.0010~0.0020in)
…
0.080mm
(0.0031in)
0.100mm
(0.0039in)
0.010mm
(0.0004in)
%
Valve seat width
Intake
Exhaust
^
0.9~1.1mm
(0.0354~0.0433in)
0.9~1.1mm
(0.0354~0.0433in)
1.6mm
(0.0630in)
1.6mm
(0.0630in)
2-6
Item
Valve springs
Free length
Intake
Exhaust
Installed length(valve closed)
Intake
Exhaust
Compressed spring force(installed)
Intake
Exhaust
Spring tilt
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
39.35mm(1.5492in)
41.57mm(1.6366in)
28.0mm(1.1024in)
30.0mm(1.1811in)
91.1~104.9N
(9.3~10.7kg, 20.48~23.58lb)
107.9~124.1N
(11.0~12.7kg, 24.26~27.90lb)
…
…
37.38mm
(1.4717in)
39.49mm
(1.5547in)
…
…
— » •
V///////////A
Intake
Exhaust
Winding direction(top view)
Intake
Exhaust
…
…
Clockwise
Clockwise
2.5°/1.7mm
(2.5°/0.0669in)
2.5°/1.8mm
(2.5°/0.0709in)
…
…
Valve seat reformed
Cylinder
Cylinder arrangement
Bore×stroke
Compression ratio
Bore
Maximum taper
Maximum out-of-round
2-7
Yes …
Forward inclined single cylinder …
38.0×43.5mm(1.496×1.713in) …
12:1
38.000~38.010mm
(1.496~1.497in)
…
…
…
…
0.05mm
(0.0020in)
0.05mm
(0.0020in)
Item
Piston
Piston-to-cylinder clearance
Diameter D
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
0.010~0.035mm
(0.0004~0.0014in)
37.975~37.990mm
(1.4951~1.4957in)
0.150mm
(0.0059in)
…
- D —
Height H
Piston pin bore(in the piston)
Diameter
"X.
Offset
Offset direction
Piston pin
Outside diameter
Piston rings
Top ring
_H
5.0mm(0.1969in)
10.002~10.013mm
(0.3938~0.3942in)
0.35~0.65mm
(0.0138~0.0256in)
Intake side
9.996~10.000mm
(0.3935~0.3937in)
Ring type
Dimensions(B×T)
End gap(installed)
Ring side clearance
2nd ring
Ring type
Dimensions(B×T)
End gap(installed)
Ring side clearance
T
B
\ I B
T I
Barrel
0.8×1.65mm
(0.0315×0.0650in)
0.05~0.15mm
(0.0020~0.0059in)
0.03~0.07mm
(0.0012~0.0028in)
Taper
0.8×1.5mm
(0.0315×0.0591in)
0.05~0.17mm
(0.0020~0.0067in)
0.02~0.06mm
(0.0008~0.0024in)
…
10.043mm
(0.3954in)
…
…
9.976mm
(0.3928in)
…
…
0.40mm
(0.0157in)
0.12mm
(0.0047in)
…
…
0.52mm
(0.0205in)
0.12mm
(0.0047in)
2-8
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit Item
Oil ring
Dimensions(B×T)
End gap(installed)
Ring side clearance
i 1 B
1 i i
T ,
1.5×1.6mm
(0.0591×0.0630in)
0.2~0.7mm
(0.0079~0.0276in)
0.03~0.15mm
(0.0012~0.0059in)
…
…
…
2-9
Item
Rocker arm/rocker arm shaft
Rocker arm inside diameter
Rocker arm shaft outside diameter
Arm-to-shaft clearance
Connecting rod
Connecting rod length
Small end inside diameter
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
10.000~10.015mm
(0.3937~0.3943in)
9.981~9.991mm
(0.3930~0.3933in)
0.009~0.034mm
(0.0004~0.0013in)
79.95~80.05mm
(3.1476~3.1516in)
10.015~10.028mm
(0.3943~0.3948in)
10.030mm
(0.3949in)
9.950mm
(0.3917in)
…
…
…
Crankshaft
Width A
Maximum runout C
Big end side clearance D
Big end radial clearance E
1^
42.45~42.50mm
(1.671~1.673in)
…
0.15~0.45mm
(0.006~0.018in)
0~0.010mm
(0~0.0004in)
…
0.03mm
(0.0012in)
1.00mm
(0.0394in)
…
2-10
Item
Clutch
Clutch type
Clutch shoe thickness
Clutch shoe spring free length
Clutch housing inside diameter
Compression spring free length
Weight outside diameter
Clutch-in revolution
Clutch-stall revolution
V-belt
V-belt width
Transmission
Transmission type
Primary reduction system
Primary reduction ratio
Secondary reduction system
Secondary reduction ratio
Single speed automatic
Maximum main axle runout
Maximum drive axle runout
Air filter type
Fuel pump
Pump type
Model(manufacturer)
Output pressure
Throttle body
Throttle cable free play
(at the flange of the throttle grip)
ID mark
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
Automatic centrifugal
3.7mm(0.146in)
30.1mm(1.185in)
107mm(4.213in)
76.4mm(3.008in)
15.0mm(0.591in)
3050~3450r/min
5000~6000r/min
17.9mm(0.705in)
V-belt automatic
Helical gear
50/13(3.846)
Helical gear
43/12(3.583)
3.087~0.945:1
…
…
Wet element
…
…
…
…
…
…
0.04mm
(0.002in)
0.04mm
(0.002in)
…
Electrical
3B3(AISAN)
250kPa(2.5kg/cm
2
, 35.6psi)
…
…
…
1.5~3.5mm(0.06~0.14in)
3B31 00
…
2.0mm
(0.079in)
…
107.5mm
(4.232in)
…
14.5mm
(0.571in)
…
…
16.1mm
(0.634in)
…
…
2-11
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Limit Item
Frame
Frame type
Caster angle
Trail
Front wheel
Wheel type
Rim
Size
Material
Wheel travel
Wheel runout
Maximum radial wheel runout
Maximum lateral wheel runout
Wheel axle bending limit
Rear wheel
Wheel type
Rim
Size
Material
Wheel travel
Wheel runout
Maximum radial wheel runout
Maximum lateral wheel runout
Front tire
Tire type
Size
Model(manufacturer)
Tire pressure(cold)
0~175kg(0~386lb)
Minimum tire tread depth
2-12
Item
Rear tire
Tire type
Size
Model(manufacturer)
Tire pressure(cold)
0~175kg(0~386lb)
Minimum tire tread depth
Front brake
Brake type
Operation
Brake lever free play(at lever end)
Brake drum inside diameter
Lining thickness
Rear brake
Brake type
Operation
Brake lever free play(at lever end)
Brake drum inside diameter
Lining thickness
Front suspension
Suspension type
Front fork type
Front fork travel
Spring
Free length
Installed length
Spring rate(K1)
Spring stroke(K1)
Optional spring available
Fork oil
Recommended oil
Quantity(each front fork leg)
Inner tube outer diameter
Inner tube bending limit
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
Tubeless
120/90-10 57J
C-6022(CHENG SHIN)
…
…
…
175kPa(1.75kgf/cm², 25psi)
…
…
0.8mm
(0.03in)
Drum brake
Right-hand operation
10~20mm(0.39~0.79in)
110mm(4.33in)
4.0mm(0.16in)
Drum brake
Left-hand operation
10~20mm(0.39~0.79in)
110mm(4.33in)
4.0mm(0.16in)
…
…
…
110.5mm
(4.35in)
2.0mm
(0.08in)
…
…
…
110.5mm
(4.35in)
2.0mm
(0.08in)
Telescopic fork
Coil spring
65mm(2.56in)
202.2mm(7.96in)
188.2mm(7.41in)
10.1N/mm(1.03kg/mm)
0~65mm(0~2.56in)
No
Fork oil 10W or equivalent
0.042L(0.038lmp qt,
0.046 US qt)
26mm(1.02in)
…
…
…
…
198.2mm
(7.80in)
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
0.2mm
(0.01in)
2-13
Spring rate(K2)
Spring stroke(K1)
Spring stroke(K2)
Optional spring available
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit Item
Steering system
Steering bearing type
Lock-to-lock angle(left)
Lock-to-lock angle(right)
Rear suspension
Suspension type
Rear shock absorber assembly type
Rear shock absorber assembly travel
Spring
Free length
Installed length
Spring rate(K1)
Angular bearing
46°
46°
Unit swing
Coil spring
45mm(1.77in)
176.5mm(6.95in)
162.5mm(6.40in)
28.03N/mm
(2.85kg/mm, 159.59lb/in)
42.18N/mm
(4.30kg/mm, 240.79lb/in)
0~17mm(0~0.67in)
17~45mm(0.67~1.77in)
No
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
2-14
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard
System voltage 12V …
Ignition system
Ignition system type
Ignition timing
Advancer type
Transistorized coil ignition
5° BTDC at 2000~2200r/min
Digita
Crankshaft position sensor resistance/color 248~372 at 20°C(68°F)/ white/red-white/blue
…
…
…
…
Ignition coil
Model(manufacturer)
Minimum ignition spark gap
Primary coil resistance
Secondary coil resistance
Spark plug cap
Material
Resistance
Charging system
System type
Model(manufacturer)
Nominal output
Stator coil resistance/color
3B3 00(T-MORIC)
6mm(0.24in)
2.16~2.64
Q at 20°C(68°F)
Resin
4~6k £2 at 20°C(68°F)
AC magneto
F3B3(T-MORIC)
14V 130W/5000r/min
0.28~0.42 at 20°C(68°F)/ white-white
…
…
…
8.64~12.96k
£2 at 20°C(68°F) …
…
…
…
…
…
…
Rectifier/regulator
Regulator type
Model(manufacturer)
No load regulated voltage
Rectifier capacity
Withstand voltage
Battery
Battery type(manufacturer)
Battery voltage/capacity
Specific gravity
Ten hour rate amperage
Headlight type
Indicator light(voltage/wattage×quantity)
Turn signal indicator light
High beam indicator light
Engine trouble warning light
Water temperature indicator light
Semiconductor, short circuit …
SH745-AA(SHINDENGEN) …
13.0~14.0V
24A
200V
GTX5L-BS(GS)
12V/4AH
1.330
0.4A
Halogen bulb
14V 3.0W×1
12V 1.7W×1
12V 1.7W×1
14V 1.7W×1
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Limit
2-15
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit Item
Bulbs(voltage/wattage×quantity)
Headlight
Tail/brake light
Front turn signal light
Rear turn signal light
License plate light
Speedometer light
Electric starting system
System type
Starter motor
Model(manufacturer)
Suction voltage
Power output
Brushes
Overall length
12V 35/35W×1
12V 5/21W×1
12V 10W×2
12V 10W×2
12V 5W×1
12V 1.7W×1
Constant mesh
3B3 00(T-MORIC)
12V
0.25kW
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Quantity
Spring force
Commutator diameter
7.0mm(0.28in)
2
3.92~5.88N
(400~600gf, 14.11~21.16oz)
17.6mm(0.69in)
3.5mm
(0.14in)
…
…
0.0378~0.0462 at 20°C(68°F)
1.35mm(0.05in)
16.6mm
(0.65in)
…
…
Commutator resistance
Mica undercut(depth)
Starter relay
Model(manufacturer)
Amperage
Coil resistance
Suction voltage
Horn
Horn type
Model(manufacturer)
Maximum amperage
Performance
Coil resistance
Turn signal relay
Relay type
Model(manufacturer)
Self-cancelling device built-in
Turn signal blinking frequency
Wattage
5WC 00(OMRON)
50A
90-110
More than DC10V
Plane
GF-127(NIKKO)
1.0A
95~115dB/2m
3.96~4.10W at 20°C(68°F)
Condenser
FZ222SD(DENSO)
NO
75~95cycles/minute
10W×2+3.4W
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
2-16
Item
Fuse(amperage×quantity)
Main fuse
Fuel gauge
Model(manufacturer)
Sender unit resistance-full
Sender unit resistance-empty
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Model(manufacturer)
Coil resistance
Diode
Radiator fan
Model(manufacturer)
Running rpm
Thermostat
Type(manufacture)
Valve opening temperature
Valve full open temperature
Valve lift-full open
Coolant temperature sensor
Model(manufacturer)
Coil resistance at 20°C(68°F)
Coil resistance at 80°C(176°F)
Intake air pressure sensor
Output voltage
Intake air temperature sensor
Coil resistance/color
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC 0 *
Standard Limit
15A×1
3B3(AISAN)
4~10 Q
90~100 £2
4HC1(MATSU SHITA)
72~88
YES
5ST1(LUNTAI)
10000r/min or less
…
…
…
4BA1(NIPPON THERMOSTAT) …
83~87°C …
…
100°C
3.5mm
…
5YP1(DENSO)
2.32~2.59k
£2
0.310~0.326k
£2
0.789~4.0V
5.7~6.3k at 20°C(68°F)/ brown-white/black-blue
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Speed sensor
Output voltage
When sensor is on
When sensor is off
Throttle position sensor
Voltage/color
Output voltage(closed position)/color
ISC(idle speed control) valve
Resistance/color
DC 4.8V or more
DC 0.6V or less
5V/blue-black/blue
0.63~0.73V/yellow-black/blue
…
…
18~22 at 20°C(68°F)/ pink-green/yellow or gray-sky blue
…
…
…
Lean angle cut-off switch
Voltage
Less than 65°
More than 65°
0.4~1.4V
3.7~4.4V
…
…
2-17
CONVERTION TABLE / GENERAL TIGHTENING
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
EAS00028
CONVERSION TABLE
All specification data in this manual are listed in SI and METRIC UNITS.
Use this table to convert METRIC unit data to
IMPERIAL unit data.
Ex.
METRIC MULTIPLIER IMPERIAL
** mm
2 mm
0.03937
0.03937
** in
0.08 in
CONVERSION TABLE
Weight
Speed
Distance
Volume/
Capacity
Misc.
METRIC TO IMPERIAL
Metric unit Multiplier Imperial unit m·kg m·kg cm·kg cm·kg
7.233
86.794
0.0723
0.8679 ft·lb in·lb ft·lb in·lb kg g km/hr km m m cm mm cc (cm
3
) cc (cm
3
) lt (liter) lt (liter)
2.205
0.03527
0.6214
0.6214
3.281
1.094
0.3937
0.03937
0.03527
0.06102
0.8799
0.2199 kg/mm kg/cm
(°C)
2
Centigrade
55.997
14.2234
9/5+32 lb oz mph mi ft yd in in oz (IMP liq.) cu-in qt (IMP liq.) gal (IMP liq.) lb/in psi (lb/in
2
)
Fahrenheit (°F)
EAS00030
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
This chart specifies tightening torques for standard fasteners with a standard ISO thread pitch. Tightening torque specifications for special components or assemblies are provided for each chapter of this manual. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross pattern and progressive stages until the specified tightening torque is reached.
Unless otherwise specified, tightening torque specifications require clean, dry threads. Components should be at room temperature.
A: Width across flats
B: Thread diameter
General tightening torques
Nm m
# kg fMb
10 mm 6 mm
12 mm 8 mm
6
15
14 mm 10 mm 30
17 mm 12 mm 55
0.6
1.5
3.0
5.5
19 mm 14 mm 85 8.5 61
22 mm 16 mm 130 13.0 94
4.3
11
22
40
2-18
TIGHTENING TORQUES
SPEC
TIGHTENING TORQUES
ENGINE
Exhaust pipe stud bolt
Oil check bolt
Cylinder head cover
Cylinder head and cylinder
Cylinder head(timing chain side)
Spark plug
Camshaft sprocket
Timing chain tensioner(body)
Guide stopper2
Timing chain tensioner(plug)
Water pump assembly
Thermostat cover air bleed bolt
Thermostat cover
Fan case
Fan
Radiator drain bolt
Radiator cover
Oil pump assembly
Engine oil drain plug
Intake manifold
Air filter assembly
Injector
Intake manifold side band
Air filter assembly side band
Protector
Exhaust pipe
Stay fender
Muffler
Reed valve and holder
AI filter case
Oil guide
Crankcase(left and right)
Cylinder stud bolt
Drain bolt(transmission oil fill bolt)
V-belt case cover
Drain bolt(transmission oil)
Transmission case
Transmission case
Cover1(starter clutch)
Hold lead plate bolt
Bolt
-
Screw
Screw
-
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Band
Band
Screw
Nut
Bolt
Bolt
-
-
Bolt
Nut
Bolt
-
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt plug
Bolt
-
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Nut
Bolt
-
-
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
-
Q
’ ty
Tightening torque
Nm m » kg ft » lb
M8 2 13 1.3 9.4
M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
—4\\4jl
M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
M10 1 13 1.3 9.4
M8 1 30 3.0 21.7
M6 2 9 0.9 6.5
M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
M8 1 8 0.8 5.8
M6 3 10 1.0 7.2
M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
M6 3 9 0.9 6.5
M10 1 1 0.1 0.7
6 3 2 0.2 1.5
M5 2 4 0.4 2.9
M35 1 32 3.2 23.1
M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
M6 1 12 1.2 8.7
M4 1 3 0.3 2.2
M4
M6
1
2
3
9
0.3
0.9
2.2
6.5
When fastened, apply screw retaining com-
M8 2 13 1.3 9.4 pound.
M8 2 10 1.0 7.2
M8 2 31 3.1 22.4
M6 1 14 1.4 10.1
M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
M6 8 10 1.0 7.2
M6 4 13 1.3 9.4
M8 1 23 2.3 16.6
M6 6 10 1.0 7.2
M6 1 13 1.3 9.4
M6 6 11 1.1 8.0
M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
M6 7 10 1.0 7.2
M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
2-19
Drain bolt(engine oil)
Centerstand spring
Starter clutch
Kickstarter
Primary fixed sheave
Clutch housing
Stator coil
Pulser coil
AC magneto rotor
Starter motor assembly
Ignition coil
Coolant temperature sensor
Cylinder head tightening sequence
(1 -» 2 -» 3 4 -» 2 -» 5 -» 6)
-
Hook
Nut
Bolt
Nut
Nut
Bolt
Screw
Nut
Bolt
Bolt
-
TIGHTENING TORQUES
SPEC 0 *
Q
’ ty
Tightening torque
Nm m » kg ft » lb
M8 1 23 2.3 16.6
M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
M22 1 90 9.0 65.1
Left-hand thread
M6 1 12 1.2 8.7
M10 1 30 3.0 21.7
M10 1 40 4.0 28.9
M5 3 4 0.4 2.9 i
^ILT
M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
M12 1 43 4.3 31.1
M6 2 13 1.3 9.4
M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
M12 1 22 2.2 15.9
2-20
TIGHTENING TORQUES
SPEC 0*"
CHASSIS
Frame and engine bracket3
Engine bracket3 and engine
Handlebar bracket and steering shaft
Rear shock absorber and frame
Rear shock absorber and engine
Steering shaft and upper bearing inner race
Steering shaft and ring nut
Front fork and lower bracket
Handlebar bracket and handlebar lower holder
Handlebar lower holder and handlebar upper holder
Throttle cable and holder lever2
Throttle cable and throttle body
Front reflector
Fuel tank
Fuel pump
Single seat lock assembly
Trunk
Bottom plate and single seat lock bracket
Bottom plate and frame(single seat)
Single seat and frame(single seat)
Single seat lock assembly and trunk
Resin part and resin cover
Footrest board
License bracket
Rear turn signal light
License light
Front wheel shaft
Front brake camshaft lever
Rear wheel shaft
Rear brake camshaft lever
Rear brake pin pivot
Speedometer cable
Main switch and headlight stay bracket
Headlight body and headlight unit
Headlight stay bracket and headlight body
Lower bracket and headlight stay bracket
Handlebar bracket and headlight stay bracket
ECU and trunk
Rear reflector and license bracket
Taillight underside
M10
M10
M10
M10
M8
BC1
BC1
M10
M10
M8
M5
M5
M5
M6
M5
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
About M5
M6
M6
M6
About M5
M10
M6
M14
M6
M8
M12
M6
M5
M6
M8
M8
M6
M5
M6
Tightening torque
Nm m » kg ft » lb
46 4.6 33.1
58 5.8 42.0
60 6.0 43.4
30 3.0 21.7
16 1.6 11.6
7 0.7 5.1 See”NOTE”
30 3.0 21.7 See”NOTE”
30 3.0 21.7
48 4.8 34.7
28 2.8 20.3
4 0.4 2.9
5 0.5 3.6
7 0.7 5.1
10 1.0 7.2
4 0.4 2.9
12 1.2 8.7
12 1.2 8.7
7 0.7 5.1
10 1.0 7.2
10 1.0 7.2
7 0.7 5.1
2 0.2 1.5
7 0.7 5.1
7 0.7 5.1
4 0.4 2.9
2 0.2 1.5
48 4.8 34.7
8 0.8 5.8
120 12.0 86.8
10 1.0 7.2
16 1.6 11.6
5 0.5 3.6
7 0.7 5.1
4 0.4 2.9
10 1.0 7.2
23 2.3 16.6
23 2.3 16.6
7 0.7 5.1
2 0.2 1.5
2 0.2 1.5
2-21
TIGHTENING TORQUES
SPEC 0 *
NOTE :
1 . First,tighten the upper bearing inner race approximately 7Nm(0.7m
» kg, 5.1ft
» lb) by using the torque wrench and check turn steering shaft smoothly.
2. Second,hold the upper bearing inner race and tighten the ring nut 30Nm(3.0m
» kg, 21.7ft
» lb) by using the torque wrench.
3. Final,operate the steering shaft together with the steering stem nut now.
© Upper bearing inner race
(2) Ring nut
2-22
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
SPEC 0 *
EAS00031
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
ENGINE
Lubrication Point
Oil seal lips
O-rings(except V-belt drive unit)
O-ring(fuel injector assembly)
Cylinder head tightening nut mounting surface
Cylinder head stud bolt thread
Cylinder head gasket dowel pin
Crankshaft pin outside surface
Connecting rod
Piston outside and ring groove
Piston pin outside surface surface and bolt thread
Crankshaft journal
Piston(balancer) outside surface
Piston pin(balancer) outside surface
Camshaft lobe
Camshaft profile journal
Valve stems(intake and exhaust)
Valve stem seals(intake and exhaust)
Valve pads(intake and exhaust)
Valve stem ends(intake and exhaust)
Oil pump assembly inside surface
Oil pipe union bolt thread and surface
Starter clutch pin and weight
Kick pinion gear and kick pinion gear clip thrust surface
Idle gear 1 thrust surface
Idle gear2
Main and drive axle serration(sprocket)
Lubricant
^ ^ T L S ^ P ^ L
^ ^ L S ^ ^ A
~~^\4Jl
~~^%4Jl
~ ^ l 4
^ H I 4
~~^\4Jl
^ H I 4
—H1C4J
~~^\4Jl
^ H I 4
^ H I 4
~ ^ 4
—^1^4^
^ H I C M !
^ H I C M !
^ H I C M I
^ H l M
— H l M l
^ H l K 4 j
^ H I 4
^ H l f 4 j
^ H l M
^ H l M
^ H l f 4 j
~~^\4Jl
~HI^G]
2-23
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
SPEC 0 *
Lubrication Point
Drive axle taper rollor bearing
Transmission bearings
Secondary fixed sheave inner surface
Secondary sliding sheave torque cam ditch
Crankcase mating surfaces
Lubricant
—HI^GJ
^HICGJ
BEL-RAY asembly lube
®
BEL-RAY asembly lube
®
Sealant
2-24
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
SPEC 0*"
EAS00032
CHASSIS
Lubrication Point
Front wheel oil seal lips
Steering bearing and bearing races(upper and lower)
Frame head pipe dust seal lips(lower)
Tube guide(throttle grip) inner surface
Brake lever and lever holder bolt sliding surface
Centerstand pivoting point and sliding surface
Single seat lock cable inner surface
Engine bracket and engine mound bolt sliding surface
Lubricant
^^LSp^L
^^LSp^L
^ ^ T L S ^ ^ ^ L
^ L S ^ ^ A
^^LSpn
^^f LS^^^L
^ ^ T L S ^ ^ ^ L
^ L S ^ H
2-25
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
SPEC 0 *
EAS00033
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
1 Raidator cap
2 Coolant reservoir hose
3 Radiator inlet hose
4 Air bleed bolt
5 Radiator outlet hose
6 Fan case
7 Damper
8 Raidator cover
A Insert until contacting with the latch of radiator tank.
B Install white paint marck of pipe 3 toward the direction of radiator cover.
C Install clip for the turning knob to face forward.
D Hand and fix the claw of fan case 1 on the radiator cover.
E Insert to the bent part of radiator pipe.
F Make sure that hose is inserted to the bottom.
G Install clip for the turning knob to face downward.
2-26
1 Radiator
2 Radiator inlet hose
3 Radiator outlet hose
4 Thermostat
5 Water pump outlet hose
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
SPEC 0 *
A Install clip for the turning knob to face downward.
2-27
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
SPEC 0 *
1 Thermostat assembly inlet breather hose
2 Breather hose
3 Water pump outlet hose
4 Radiator outlet hose
5 Water pump
A Install the paint mark of hose facing up.
B Install clip for the turning knob to face downward.
C Make sure that hose is inserted to the bottom.
D Align the paint mark of pipe 7 to the stopper of water pump Ass’y.
E Insert until contacting with the stopper.
2-28
EAS00035
CABLE ROUTING
1 Hose3
2 ECU
3 Ignition coil
4 Sidestand switch lead
5 Main switch
6 Hose
7 Coolant temperature sensor
8 Wiring harness
9 Throttle cable kit
0 Rear brake cable q AC magneto lead w Hose5 e Starter motor lead
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC 0 * r t
A
B
C
D
E
Battery positive lead
Wire lead cover
Assemble cramp on the Tstud at the right of back stay.
Install the protruding part of cable strap of electrical wire harmess Ass’y on the hole of box bracket 1 .
Install crap on the hols of stay 1 .
Penetrate thermo unit lead through the rear of hose 3.
Install the protruding part of cable strap of electrical wire harmess Ass’y on the hole of down tube 1 .
F Fix connector cover on the head light stay.
G Install the protruding part of cable strap of electrical wire harmess Ass’y on the hole of fuel tank bracket 2.
H Connect AC magnet lead on the cramp of fan case
1.
D-D
6
E-E
2-29
F-F G-G
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC 0 *
1 Speedometer A
2 Rectifier/Regulator cover the coupler.
3 Turn signal relay B
4 Throttle cable Ass’y C
5 Holder
6 Cable holder
7 Rear brake cable
8 Speedometer cable cable, fix crank case 1 .
When locking, make sure that the stopper at the front of holder touches the posi-
9 Front brake cable tion of crank case 1 .
0 Headlight D q Horn cable, install the protruding w Starting circuit cut-off relay part of cramp on the hole of under cover.
E Install the horn of coupler accotding to the direction shown in the drawing, and make sure that it is not loosen easily.
F Penetrate through the speed meter cable.
2-30
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC 0 *
1 Fuel pump i Rear fender
2 FI diagnostic tool conneco Fuel injector lead tor
3 Fuse box
4 Battery negative lead
5 ECU lead
6 Battery positive lead
7 Starter relay p s
A
B
Sub-wire harness lead valve lead
Crankcase2
Enter slant angle of sensor.
Enter tail/brake light.
E Put the idle speed control lead and wire sub lead in, and then close the cramp. a ISC(idle speed control) F Wire the starting device of the rear fender of rear motor lead and crank case 2.
Do not clip the lead in.
8 AC magneto lead
9 Tail/brake light lead
0 Starter motor lead q Holder w Cable holder
C
D
Fix throttle cable Ass’y. Install the protruding part of cramp on the hole of fuel tank bracket.
Fix throttle cable Ass’y. Ine Lean angle cut-off switch r Ignition coil t Throttle cable Ass’y y Rear brake cable u Wiring harness stall the protruding part of cramp on the hole of foot rest bracket. dx
©©
D
©
C © ® © © ©
5
A-A u o t
D-D E-E
B-B p a
2-31
E
F-F
C-C s F y
G-G
1 Speedometer
2 Rectifier/Regulator
3 Horn
4 Turn signal relay
5 Front brake cable
6 Rear brake cable
7 Throttle cable Ass’y
8 Speedometer cable
9 Rectifier/Regulator lead
0 Wiring harness q Main switch lead w Horn lead
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC 0 *
A Penetrate the rear brake D Penetrate the main switch cable and throttle cable Comp. Lead into the conthrough the left side of car body.
B Make sure to install the cramp on the head light
E nector cover.
Penetrate horn cable through the connector cover without sticking out stay. horn cable.
C Install the protruding part of F Enter rectifier and regulator cable strap of electrical wire harmess Ass’y on the hole of head light stay.
Ass’y.
1
2
G-
®-
-©
C
B
C xi)
-©
C
A
F
XD
-©
®
0
A-A B-B
2-32
G Let the left and right flasher lights, meter, and right lead wire of handle bar switch to face upward, let the main switch, front and rear brake switchand left lead wire of handle bar switch to face downward, connect to the coupler, and then store in the connector cover.
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC 0 *
1
2 m-
®-
C
-©
C
B
C-
F
A-A B-B
0
2-33
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC 0 *
1 Turn signal light lead(right) A Penetrate the rear brake
2 Handlebar switch lead(right)
3 Front brake light switch lead
4 Turn signal light lead(left)
B through the left side of car body.
Make sure to install the cramp on the head light
5 Handlebar switch lead(left)
6 Rear brake light switch
7 Throttle cable Ass’y
8 Front brake cable
9 Rear brake cable
0 Backward screw q Forward screw
C
D stay.
Install the protruding part of cable strap of electrical wire harmess Ass’y on the hole of head light stay.
Penetrate the main switch
Comp. Lead into the connector cover.
E Penetrate horn cable through the connector cover without sticking out horn cable.
F Enter rectifier and regulator
Ass’y.
G First, tighting the backward screw and tighting the forward screw.
2-34
CHAPTER 3
PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
CHK
ADJ
< &
INTRODUCTION 3-1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND MINOR REPAIR 3-2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CON-
TROL SYSTEM 3-2
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART 3-3
COVER AND PANEL 3-5
SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT 3-5
SINGLE SEAT AND TRUNK 3-7
LEG SHIELD1,2 3-8
FOOTREST BOARD AND INNER FENDER 3-9
ENGINE 3-10
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE 3-10
CHECKING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED 3-16
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY 3-17
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG 3-18
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING 3-20
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE 3-22
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL 3-24
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL 3-25
CHANGING THE TRANSMISSION OIL 3-27
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 3-28
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT 3-30
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINT AND INTAKE
MANIFOLD 3-32
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSE 3-32
CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSES 3-33
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM 3-34
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL 3-35
CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM 3-36
CHANGING THE COOLANT 3-37
CHASSIS 3-40
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE 3-40
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE 3-40
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE SHOES 3-41
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD 3-42
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK 3-44
CHECKING THE TIRES 3-45
CHK
ADJ
< &
CHECKING THE WHEELS 3-48
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES 3-48
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS 3-49
LUBRICATING THE CENTERSTAND 3-49
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3-50
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY 3-50
CHECKING THE FUSE 3-56
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB 3-58
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM 3-59
INTRODUCTION
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00036
PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended checks and adjustments.
If followed, these preventive maintenance procedures will ensure more reliable vehicle operation, a longer service life and reduce the need for costly overhaul work. This information applies to vehicles already in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared for sale. All service technicians should be familiar with this entire chapter.
NOTE:
The annual checks must be performed every year, except if a kilometer-based maintenance is performed instead.
From 30,000 km, repeat the maintenance intervals starting from 6,000 km.
Items marked with an asterisk should be performed by a Yamaha dealer as they require special tools, data and technical skills.
3-1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND MINOR REPAIR
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND MINOR REPAIR
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
NO. ITEM ROUTINE
1
2
3
4
* Fuel line
Spark plug
* Valve clearance
*
Crankcase breather system
• Check fuel and vacuum hoses for cracks or damage.
• Replace if necessary.
• Check condition.
• Adjust gap and clean.
• Replace at 4000 mi (7000 km) or
12 months and thereafter every
4000 mi (6000 km) or 12 months.
• Check and adjust valve clearance when engine is cold.
• Check breather hose for cracks or damage.
• Replace if necessary.
5
6
7
* Fuel injection • Check engine idle speed.
* Exhaust system
• Check for leakage.
• Tighten if necessary.
• Replace gasket(s) if necessary.
* Air induction system
• Check the air cut-off valve, reed valve, and hose for damage.
• Replace any damaged parts.
INITIAL
600 mi
(1,000 km) or
1 month
2,000 mi
(4,000 km) or
6 months
ODOMETER READING
4,000 mi
(7,000 km) or
12 months
6,000 mi 8,000 mi
(10,000 km) or
18 months
(13,000 km) or
24 months
10,000 mi
(16,000 km) or
30 months
V
V V V V V
V Replace. V Replace.
Every 6000 mi (10000 km)
V
V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
* Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, have a Yamaha dealer perform the service.
3-2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND MINOR REPAIR
CHK
ADJ
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART
< &
NO. ITEM ROUTINE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
* Air filter element
* Front brake
* Rear brake
* Wheels
* Tires
* Wheel bearings
* Steering bearings
• Replace.
• Check operation.
• Adjust cable and replace brake shoes if necessary.
• Check operation.
• Adjust cable and replace brake shoes if necessary.
• Check runout and for damage.
• Replace if necessary.
• Check tread depth and for damage.
• Replace if necessary.
• Check air pressure.
• Correct if necessary.
• Check bearings for smooth operation.
• Replace if necessary.
• Check bearing assemblies for looseness.
• Moderately repack with lithiumsoap-based grease every 8000 mi
(13000 km) or 24 months.
8
9
12
* Chassis fasteners
• Check all chassis fitting and fasteners.
• Correct if necessary.
Front and rear brake lever pivot
• Apply lithium-soap-based grease
(all-purpose grease) lightly.
*
*
Centerstand
Front fork
Shock absorber assembly
Engine oil
• Check operation.
• Lubricate.
• Check operation and for oil leakage.
• Replace if necessary.
• Check operation and for oil leakage.
• Replace if necessary.
• Change (warm engine before draining).
• Check oil level and vehicle for oil leakage.
15 *
Engine oil strainer
Cooling system
• Clean.
• Check coolant level and vehicle for coolant leakage.
• Change.
• Check vehicle for oil leakage.
• Change.
16
Final transmission oil
17 * V-belt • Replace.
18 *
Front and rear brake switches
• Check operation.
19 *
Control and meter cables
• Apply Yamaha chain and cable lube or engine oil 10W-30 thoroughly.
20 *
Throttle grip housing and cable
• Check operation and free play.
• Adjust the throttle cable free play if necessary.
• Lubricate the throttle grip housing and cable.
2 1 *
Lights, signals and switches
• Check operation.
• Adjust headlight beam.
INITIAL
600 mi
(1,000 km) or
1 month
2,000 mi
(4,000 km) or
6 months
ODOMETER READING
4,000 mi
(7,000 km) or
12 months
6,000 mi
(10,000 km) or
18 months
8,000 mi
(13,000 km) or
24 months
10,000 mi
(16,000 km) or
30 months v v v v v
V V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
Repack. V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V
V V V V V
Every 3 years
V V V
Every 6250 mi (10000 km)
V V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V V
3-3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND MINOR REPAIR
CHK
ADJ
< &
* Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, have a Yamaha dealer perform the service.
NOTE:
From 12000mi(19000km) or 36 months, repeat the maintenance intervals starting from
4000mi(7000km) or 12 months.
EAU17680
NOTE:
The air filter needs more frequent service if you are riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
3-4
EAS00038
COVER AND PANEL
SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT
COVER AND PANEL
CHK
ADJ
< &
Order
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Job/Part
Removing the side covers and tail/ brake light
Front cover
Side cover(left)
Side cover(right)
Tail/brake and rear turn signal light(left and right)
Battery cover
Battery negative lead
Battery positive lead
Battery
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 c
C
8First, disconnect the negative battery lead, and then the positive battery lead.
8After installing the battery be sure to turn the main switch from “ON” to “OFF” three times in 3 seconds intervals to initialize the idle speed
3-5
COVER AND PANEL
CHK
ADJ
< &
Order Job/Part
Q’ty
Remarks control system.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-6
SINGLE SEAT AND TRUNK
COVER AND PANEL
CHK
ADJ
< &
\y10Nm(1.0m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
\ l 12Nm(1.2m« kg, 8.7 ft* lb)
[s& 7Nm(0.7m• kg, 5.1 ft• lb)
" 10
/ \
/ \
/
'/* *£® /
/
/
/ 8
Order Job/Part
Removing the single seat and trunk
Side cover(left and right)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Single seat
Single seat upper cover
Bottom plate
Frame(single seat)
ECU
Starter relay
Main fuse
8 Single seat lock assembly
9 Helmet holder
10 Trunk
Remarks
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”.
1
1
2
1
1 Disconnect.
1 Disconnect.
1 Disconnect.
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-7
LEG SHIELD1,2
COVER AND PANEL
CHK
ADJ
< &
Order Job/Part
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Caution, do not damage the claw while removing.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-8
FOOTREST BOARD AND INNER FENDER
COVER AND PANEL
CHK
ADJ
< &
Order Job/Part
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “SINGLE SEAT AND TRUNK “.
When installing the fuel tank cap, align it cap end and the mark on the car body.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-9
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
EAS00049
ENGINE
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
The following procedure applies to all of the valves.
NOTE:
• Valve clearance adjustment should be made on a cold engine, at room temperature.
• When the valve clearance is to be measured or adjusted, the piston must be at top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke.
1. Remove:
• front cover
• side cover(left and right)
• battery /battery cover
• single seat/trunk
• footrest board
• Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
2. Drain:
• coolant
(completely from the radiator)
3. Remove:
• radiator cover ®
• radiator
• fan case ®
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
4. Remove:
• spark plug cap
• spark plug
• ignition coil
• cylinder head cover
5. Remove:
• water pump
Refer to”WATER PUMP”in chapter 6.
6. Measure:
• valve clearance
Out of specification -» Adjust.
Valve clearance (cold)
Intake valve
0.10 ~ 0.16mm(0.0039 ~ 0.0063in)
Exhaust valve
0.18 ~ 0.24mm(0.0071 ~ 0.0094in)
3-10
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
CHK
ADJ
< &
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise. b. When the piston is at TDC on the compression stroke, align the punch mark a in the camshaft sprocket with the stationary b on the plate. c. Align the TDC mark c on the AC magneto rotor with the stationary pointer d on the crankcase cover. d. Measure the valve clearance with a thickness gauge ® .
Out of specification -» Adjust.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3-11
7. Adjust: valve clearance
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Remove the timing chain tensioner and camshaft sprocket. b. Remove the head nuts, bolts and plate. c. Remove the rocker arm shaft, rocker arm and collar. d. Remove the valve p a d 2 with a magnetic b a r 1 .
NOTE:
8 Cover the timing chain opening with a rag to prevent the valve pad from falling into the crankcase.
8 Make a note of the position of each valve pad so that they can be installed in the correct place. e. Select the proper valve pad from the following table.
Valve pad thickness range Available valve pads
Nos.
120 ~ 240
1.20 (0.0472in)
~ 2.40 mm
(0.0945 in)
25 thicknesses in
0.05 mm (0.002 in) increments f. Round off the original valve pad number according to the following table.
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
CHK
ADJ
< &
Last digit
0 or 2
5
8
Rounded value
0
5
10
EXAMPLE:
Original valve pad number =148(thickness
=1.48mm(0.0583in))
Rounded value =150 g. Locate the rounded number of the original valve pad and the measured valve clearance in the valve pad selection table. The point where the column and row intersect is the new valve pad number.
NOTE:
The new valve pad number is only an approximation. The valve clearance must be measured again and the above steps should be repeated if the measurement is still incorrect. h. Install the new valve pad .
NOTE:
• Lubricate the valve pad with molybdenum disulfide oil.
• Install the valve pad in the correct place. i. Install the rocker arm, collar and rocker arm shaft. j. Install the plate and cylinder head nuts
X | 10Nm(1.0m
* kg, 7.2ft
* lb) k. Install the cylinder head bolts .
X | 10Nm(1.0m
* kg, 7.2ft
* lb) l. Install the camshaft sprocket.
X | 30Nm(3.0m
* kg, 21.7ft
* lb) m. Install the timing chain tensioner and gasket.
X | 9Nm(0.9m
* kg, 6.5ft
* lb)
3-12
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
CHK
ADJ
< & n. Install the timing chain tensioner spring and cap bolt .
X I 8Nm(0.8m
* kg, 5.8ft
* lb) o. Measure the valve clearance again. p. If the valve clearance is still out of specification, repeat all of the valve clearance adjustment steps until the specified clearance is obtained.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3-13
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
INTAKE
ORIGINAL VALVE PAD NUMBER •
0.00~0.04
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 0.05~0.09
0.10~0.16
0.17~0.21 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.22~0.26 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.27~0.31 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.32~0.36 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.37~0.41 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.42~0.46 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.47~0.51 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.52~0.56 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.57~0.61 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.62~0.66 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.67~0.71 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.72~0.76 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.77~0.81 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.82~0.86 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.87~0.91 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.92~0.96 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.97~1.01 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.02~1.06 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.07~1.11 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.12~1.16 220 225 230 235 240
1.17~1.21 225 230 235 240
1.22~1.26 230 235 240
1.27~1.31 235 240
1.32~1.36 240
VALVE CLEARANCE(cold):
0.10~0.16mm(0.0039~0.0063in)
Example:175 pad is installed
Measured clearance is 0.24mm(0.0094in)
Replace pad 175 with pad 185
Pad number: (example)
Pad No.175=1.75mm(0.0689in)
Pad No.185=1.85mm(0.0728in)
EXHAUST
ORIGINAL VALVE PAD NUMBER X
0.00~0.02
0.03~0.07
0.08~0.12
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 0.13~0.17
0.18~0.24
0.25~0.29 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.30~0.34 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.35~0.39 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.40~0.44 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.45~0.49 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.50~0.54 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.55~0.59 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.60~0.64 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.65~0.69 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.70~0.74 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.75~0.79 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.80~0.84 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.85~0.89 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.90~0.94 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.95~0.99 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.00~1.04 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.05~1.09 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.10~1.14 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.15~1.19 215 220 225 230 235 240
1.20~1.24 220 225 230 235 240
1.25~1.29 225 230 235 240
1.30~1.34 230 235 240
1.35~1.39 235 240
1.40~1.44 240
VALVE CLEARANCE(cold):
3-14
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
CHK
ADJ
< &
8. Install:
8all removed parts
NOTE:
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
9. Fill:
8cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recommended coolant)
Refer to”CHANGING THE COOLANT”.
3-15
CHECKING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00054
CHECKING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED
NOTE:
Prior to adjusting the engine idling speed, the air filter element should be clean, and the engine should have adequate compression.
1. Start the engine and let it warm up for several minutes.
2. Remove:
8 panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
3. Connect:
8 digital circuit tester
(onto the spark plug lead of cylinder)
Digital circuit tester
90890-06760
4. Check:
• engine idling speed
Out of specification -» Replace the throttle body assembly.
A Engine idling speed
2000~2200r/min
5. Install:
8 panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
3-16
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY
EAS00056
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE
PLAY
NOTE:
Prior to adjusting the throttle cable free play, the engine idling speed should be adjusted properly.
1. Check:
• throttle cable free play a
Out of specification ^Adjust.
Throttle cable free play (at the flange of the throttle grip)
1.5~3.5mm (0.06~0.14in)
2. Adjust:
8throttle cable free play
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Handlebar side a. Loosen the locknut 1 . b. Turn the adjusting nut 2 in direction a or b until the specified throttle cable free play is obtained.
Direction a Throttle cable free play is increased.
Direction b Throttle cable free play is decreased. c. Tighten the locknut. w
After adjusting the throttle cable free play, start the engine and turn the handlebars to the right and to the left to ensure that this does not cause the engine idling speed to change.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3-17
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG
EAS00060
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG
1 . Remove:
8 panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
2. Disconnect:
8 spark plug cap w
Remove the spark plug cap, the engine is extremely hot.
3. Remove:
8 spark plug c C
Before removing the spark plug, blow away any dirt accumulated in the spark plug well with compressed air to prevent it from falling into the cylinder.
4. Check:
8 spark plug type
Incorrect -* Change.
Spark plug type (manufacturer)
CR7E(NGK)
3-18
5. Check:
8 electrode ©
Damage/wear -* Replace the spark plug.
8 insulator ©
Abnormal color -* Replace the spark plug.
Normal color is medium-to-light tan.
6. Clean:
8 spark plug
(with a spark plug cleaner or wire brush)
7. Measure:
8 spark plug gap a
(with a wire Thickness gauge)
Out of specification -* Regap.
Spark plug gap
0.7 ~0.8mm(0.028 ~0.031in)
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG
CHK
ADJ
< &
8. Install:
• spark plug
X I 13Nm(1.3m
* kg, 9.4ft
* lb)
NOTE:
Before installing the spark plug, clean the spark plug and gasket surface.
9. Connect:
• spark plug cap
10. Install:
• panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
3-19
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00062
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING wiring connections of the entire ignition system.
Make sure all connections are tight and free of corrosion.
1. Remove:
8front cover
8side cover(left and right)
8battery /battery cover
8single seat/trunk
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
2. Drain:
8coolant
(completely from the radiator)
3. Remove:
8radiator cover
8radiator
8fan case
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
4. Attach:
8timing light 1
8digital circuit tester2
(onto the spark plug lead of cylinder)
Timing light
90890-03141
YU-03141
Digital circuit tester
90890-06760
3-20
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
CHK
ADJ
< &
5. Check:
8ignition timing
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then let it run at the specified engine idling speed.
A Engine idling speed
2000 ~ 2200r/min b. Check that the mark a on the AC magneto rotor is within the firing range b on the right crankcase cover.
Incorrect firing range -» Check the ignition system.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
NOTE:
The ignition timing is not adjustable.
6. Remove:
• timing light
• digital circuit tester
7. Install:
• fan case
• radiator
• radiator cover
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
8. Fill:
• cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recommended coolant)
Refer to”CHANGING THE COOLANT”.
9. Install:
• single seat/trunk
• battery /battery cover
• side cover(left and right)
• front cover
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
3-21
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00067
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRES-
SURE
NOTE:
Insufficient compression pressure will result in a loss of performance.
1. Measure:
8 valve clearance
Out of specification -» Adjust
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE
CLEARANCE”.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
3. Remove:
8 panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
4. Disconnect:
8 spark plug cap w
Remove the spark plug cap, the engine is extremely hot.
5. Remove:
8spark plug c C
Before removing the spark plug, use compressed air to blow away any dirt accumulated in the spark plug well to prevent it from falling into the cylinder.
6. Install:
8compression gauge 1
3-22
^
Compression gauge
90890-03081
YU-33223
7. Measure:
8 compression pressure
Out of specification -» Refer to steps (c) and (d).
Compression pressure (at sea level)
Minimum
1262kPa(12.62kg/cm
2
, 179.7psi)
Standard
1450kPa(14.5kg/cm
2
, 206.5psi)
Maximum
1624kPa(16.24kg/cm
2
, 231.3psi)
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Set the main switch to “ON”. b. With the throttle wide open, crank the engine until the reading on the compression gauge stabilizes.
FflWUzWIgM
To prevent sparking, ground the spark plug lead before cranking the engine. c. If the compression pressure is above the maximum specification, check the cylinder head, valve surfaces, and piston crown for carbon deposits.
Carbon deposits -» Eliminate. d. If the compression pressure is below the minimum specification, pour a teaspoonful engine of oil into the spark plug bore and measure again.
Refer to the following table.
Compression pressure
(with oil applied into the cylinder)
Reading Diagnosis
Higher than without oil Piston ring(s) wear or damage -» Repair.
Same as without oil Piston ring(s), valves, cylinder head gasket or piston possibly defective -» Repair.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8. Remove:
• compression gauge
9. Install:
• spark plug
X I 13Nm(1.3m
* kg9.4ft
* lb)
10. Connect:
• spark plug cap
11. Install:
• panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
3-23
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
EAS00069
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface.
NOTE:
8 Place the scooter on a suitable stand.
8 Make sure the scooter is upright.
- T - V ~//
/
^(S) \ ^ ^ \
<\l.
}yyf(M' ^
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
3. Check:
8 engine oil level
The engine oil level should be between the minimum level mark a and maximum level mark b .
Below the minimum level mark -» Add the recommended engine oil to the proper level.
i b
!
a
*0
Recommended engine oil type
YAMALUBE 4, SAE10W30 or
SAE20W40
Recommended engine oil grade
API service SG type or higher
JASO standard MA c C
Do not allow foreign materials to enter the crankcase.
NOTE:
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few minutes until the oil has settled.
4. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
5. Check the engine oil level again.
NOTE:
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few minutes until the oil has settled.
3-24
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00076
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
1. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
2. Place a container under the engine oil drain bolt.
3. Remove:
8engine oil filler cap 1
8engine oil drain bolt 2
(along with the gasket)
4. Drain:
8engine oil
(completely from the crankcase)
5. If the oil filter element is also to be replaced or cleaned, perform the following procedure.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Remove the oil strainer cover 1,spring3 and oil filter element 4 . b. Replace the O-ring New 2 c. Install the new or clean oil filter element and the oil strainer cover.
Oil strainer cover
32Nm(3.2m
• kg, 23.1ft
• lb)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6. Install:
• engine oil drain bolt
(along with the gasket)
3-25
X | 23Nm(2.3m
* kg, 16.6ft
* lb)
7. Fill:
• crankcase
(with the specified amount of the recommended engine oil)
«0
Quantity
Total amount
0.8~0.9L(0.74~0.83 Imp qt, 0.87~0.98
US qt)
Periodic oil change
0.73~0.83L(0.67~0.76 Imp qt,
0.80~0.90 US qt)
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
8. Install:
8engine oil filler cap
9. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
10.Check:
8engine
(for engine oil leaks)
11.Check:
8engine oil level
Refer to “CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
LEVEL”.
12.Check: engine oil pressure
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Slightly loosen the oil gallery bolt <RN.1>. b. Start the engine and keep it idling until engine oil starts to seep from the oil gallery bolt. If no engine oil comes out after one minute, turn the engine off so that it will not seize. c. Check the engine oil passages, the oil filter cartridge and the oil pump for damage or leakage. Refer to “OIL PUMP” in chapter 5. d. Start the engine after solving the problem(s) and check the engine oil pressure again. e. Tighten the oil gallery bolt to specification.
V
%
Oil gallery bolt
7Nm (0.7m
• kg, 5.1ft
• lb)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3-26
CHANGING THE TRANSMISSION OIL
CHK
ADJ
< &
CHANGING THE TRANSMISSION OIL
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface.
NOTE:
• Stand the scooter on a suitable stand.
• Make sure that the scooter upright.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
3. Place a container under the transmission oil drain bolt.
4 Remove:
• transmission oil fill bolt
(along with the gasket)
• transmission oil drain bolt ©
5. Drain:
• transmission oil
(completely from the transmission case)
6. Install:
• transmission oil drain bolt
X I 13Nm(1.3m
* kg, 9.4ft
* lb)
7. Fill:
• transmission case
(with the specified amount of the recommended transmission oil)
K} Recommended oil
SAE10W30 hypoid gear oil
Total amount
0.11~0.13L(0.10~0.12 Imp qt,
0.12~0.14 US qt)
Periodic oil change
0.09~0.11L(0.08~0.10 Imp qt,
0.10~0.12 US qt)
8. Install:
• transmission oil fill bolt ©
(along with the gasket)
X I 23Nm(2.3m
* kg, 16.6ft
* lb)
3-27
9. Start the engine for several minutes to warm it up and check for the oil leakage.
10.Check:
• transmission case
(for transmission oil leaks)
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
EAS00077
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1. Check:
8 engine oil level
Below the minimum level mark -» Add the recommended engine oil to the proper level.
Refer to”CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
LEVEL”.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
C
When the engine is cold, the engine oil will have a higher viscosity, causing the engine oil pressure to increase. Therefore, be sure to measure the engine oil pressure after warming up the engine.
3. Remove:
8 panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
4. Lossen:
8oil gallery bolt 1 w
The engine, muffler and engine oil are extremely hot.
5. Check:
8engine oil pressure
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Start the engine and keep it idling until engine oil starts to seep from the oil gallery bolt. If no engine oil comes out after one minute, turn the engine off so that it will not seize. b. Check the engine oil passages, the oil filter and oil pump for damage or leakage.Refer to”OIL PUMP” in chapter 5. c. Start the engine after solving the problem(s) and check the engine oil pressure again.
3-28
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
CHK
ADJ
< &
6. Install:
8oil gallery bolt
X I 7Nm(0.7m
* kg, 5.1ft
* lb)
7. Install:
• panel
Refer to”FOOTREST BOARD AND IN-
NER FENDER”.
3-29
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
EAS00086
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
1. Remove:
8front cover
8side cover(left)
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”.
2. Remove:
8air filter case c o v e r 1
8air filter element
3-30
3. Check:
8 air filter element ©
Damage/dirty^ Replace.
NOTE:
8 Replace the air filter element every
4000km(2000mi) .
8 The air filter needs more frequent service if you are riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
4. Install:
8 air filter element
8 air filter case cover
X I 10Nm(1.0m
* kg, 7.2ft
* lb)
C
Never operate the engine without the air filter element installed. Unfiltered air will cause rapid wear of engine parts and may damage the engine. Operating the engine without the air filter element will also affect the throttle body tuning, leading to poor engine performance and possible overheating.
NOTE:
When installing the air filter element into the air filter case cover, make sure their sealing surfaces are aligned to prevent any air leaks.
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
CHK
ADJ
< &
5. Install:
8side cover(left)
8front cover
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”.
3-31
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINT AND
INTAKE MANIFOLD/CHECKING THE FUEL HOSE
EAS00094
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINT
AND INTAKE MANIFOLD
1. Remove:
8front cover
8side cover(left and right)
8single seat/trunk
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
2. Check:
• throttle body joint (T)
• intake manifold (2)
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
Refer to “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” in chapter 7.
3. Install:
• single seat/trunk
• side cover(left and right)
• front cover
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
EAS00096
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSE
The following procedure applies to all of the fuel hose.
1. Remove:
• front cover
• side cover(left and right)
• single seat/trunk
• footrest board
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
3-32
2. Check:
• fuel hose (T)
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
Loose connection -» Connect properly.
3. Install:
• footrest board
• single seat/trunk
• side cover(left and right)
• front cover
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSES
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00098
CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSES
1. Remove:
8front cover
8side cover(left and right)
8single seat/trunk
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”. fer
\ \
X
\ ^ V v^ tx tU
1>f a i i l ^
Si M ^
> i
2. Check:
8 breather hose (T)
8 transmission case breather hose (2)
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
Loose connection -» Connect properly.
C
Make sure the breather hoses are routed correctly.
3. Install:
8single seat/trunk
8side cover(left and right)
8front cover
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
3-33
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
EAS00099
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
The following procedure applies to all of the muffler assembly and gasket.
1. Remove:
8muffler assembly
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL”in chapter
5.
2. Check:
• muffler assembly (T)
Crack/damage -» Replace.
• gasket (2)
Exhaust gas leak -» Replace.
3. Check:
• tightening torque
Exhaust pipe nut (3)
13Nm(1.3m
• kg, 9.4ft
• lb)
Muffler and rear arm bolt (4)
31Nm(3.1m
• kg, 22.4ft
• lb)
4. Install:
8muffler assembly
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL”in chapter
5.
3-34
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL
EAS00103
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface.
NOTE:
8 Place the scooter on a suitable stand.
8 Make sure the scooter is upright.
2. Check:
8 coolant level
The coolant level should be between the maximum level mark a and minimum level mark b .
Below the minimum level mark -» Add the recommended coolant to the proper level.
C
8 Adding water instead of coolant lowers the antifreeze content of the coolant. If water is used instead of coolant check, and if necessary, correct the antifreeze concentration of the coolant.
8 Use only distilled water. However, if distilled water is not available, soft water may be used.
3. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
4. Check:
8 coolant level
NOTE:
Before checking the coolant level, wait a few minutes until it settles.
3-35
CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM
EAS00104
CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM
1. Remove:
8front cover
8side cover(left and right)
8battery /battery cover
8single seat/trunk
8footrest board
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
8radiator cover
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
J l " iy,
\ / -/C-^y ^
<^Cl&
^^\^y^fe^^\^p—\
N^gf
/ ^ I \ X M T ^
^ ^ v
Vg
°V
X3
'•'•':\ 1 '
^7
/
*
s
o )
^~ ^ ^^sr^/^js,
2. Check:
• radiator ©
• radiator inlet hose (2)
• radiator outlet hose (3)
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
Refer to “COOLING SYSTEM” in chapter 6.
3. Install:
• radiator cover
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
• footrest board
• single seat/trunk
• battery /battery cover
• side cover(left and right)
• front cover
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
3-36
CHANGING THE COOLANT
EAS00105
CHANGING THE COOLANT
1. Remove:
8front cover
8side cover(right)
8coolant reservoir cap cover
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
8radiator cover
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
2. Disconnect:
8coolant reservoir hose 1
3. Drain:
8coolant
(from the coolant reservoir)
8coolant
(from the radiator under drain bolt)
4. Remove:
8radiator cap
8coolant reservoir cap w
A hot radiator is under pressure. Therefore, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Scalding hot fluid and steam may be blown out, which could cause serious injury. When the engine has cooled, open the radiator cap as follows:
Place a thick rag or a towel over the radiator cap and slowly turn the radiator cap counterclockwise toward the detent to allow any residual pressure to escape. When the hissing sound has stopped, press down on the radiator cap and turn it counterclockwise to remove.
5. Connect:
8coolant reservoir hose
6. Install:
8radiator under drain bolt
X I 1Nm(0.1m
* kg, 0.7ft
* l b )
3-37
CHANGING THE COOLANT
7. Fill:
8cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recommended coolant)
«0 Recommended antifreeze
High-quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing corrosion inhibitors for aluminum engines
Mixing ratio
4:6(antifreeze:water)
Quantity
Total amount
0.50L(0.46 Imp qt, 0.53 US qt)
Coolant reservoir capacity
0.26L(0.23 Imp qt, 0.28 US qt)
Up to the maximum level mark
3-38
NOTE:
The specified amount of coolant is a standard amount. Fill the cooling system with coolant until coolant comes out of the air bleed bolt hole.
Handling notes for coolant
Coolant is potentially harmful and should be handled with special care. w
If coolant splashes in your eyes, thoroughly wash them with water and consult a doctor.
If coolant splashes on your clothes, quickly wash it away with water and then with soap and water.
If coolant is swallowed, induce vomiting and get immediate medical attention. c C
Adding water instead of coolant lowers the antifreeze content of the coolant. If water is used instead of coolant check, and if necessary, correct the antifreeze concentration of the coolant.
Use only distilled water. However, if distilled water is not available, soft water may be used.
If coolant comes into contact with painted surfaces, immediately wash them with water.
Do not mix different types of antifreeze.
8. Install:
8radiator cap
CHANGING THE COOLANT
CHK
ADJ
< &
9. Fill:
8coolant reservoir
(with the recommended coolant to the maximum level mark 1 )
10.Install:
8coolant reservoir cap
11.Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then stop it.
12.Check:
8coolant level
Refer to “CHECKING THE COOLANT
LEVEL”.
NOTE:
Before checking the coolant level, wait a few minutes until the coolant has settled.
13.Install:
8radiator cover
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
8coolant reservoir cap cover
8side cover(right)
8front cover
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”.
3-39
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE/
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00109
CHASSIS
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE
1. Check:
8 brake lever free play a
Out of specification -» Adjust.
Brake lever free play (at the end of the brake lever)
10~20mm(0.39~0.79in)
2. Adjust:
8brake lever free play
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the adjusting nut 1 in direction a or b until the specified brake lever free play is obtained.
Direction a Brake lever free play is increased.
Direction b Brake lever free play is decreased. c C
After adjusting the brake lever free play, make sure there is no brake drag.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3-40
EAS00114
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
1. Check:
8 brake lever free playa
Out of specification -» Adjust.
Brake lever free play
10~ 20mm(0.39~ 0.79in)
2. Adjust:
8brake lever free play
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the adjusting nut 1 in direction a or b until the specified brake lever free play is obtained.
Direction a Brake lever free play is increased.
Direction b Brake lever free play is decreased. c C
After adjusting the brake lever free play, make sure there is no brake drag.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE SHOES
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00127
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE
SHOES
1. Operate the brake.
2. Check:
• wear indicator (T)
Reaches the wear limit line (2) -» Replace the brake shoes as a set.
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE” and “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE” in chapter 4.
A Front brake
B Rear brake
3-41
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00148
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEER-
ING HEAD
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the scooter on a suitable stand so that the front wheel is elevated.
2. Check:
• steering head
Grasp the bottom of the front fork legs and gently rock the front fork.
Binding/looseness -» Adjust the steering head.
3. Remove:
• front fork upper cover
• front fork cover(left, right)
• leg shield1,2
Refer to”LEG SHIELD1,2".
• headlight stay bracket
Refer to”HANDLE BRACKET AND
HEADLIGHT STAY BRACKET”in chapter 4.
4. Adjust:
8steering head
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Loosen the steering nut 1 and then tighten it to specification with the ring nut wrench.
NOTE:
Set the torque wrench at a right angle to the steering nut wrench.
P* Ring nut wrench
90890-01268
YU-01268
3-42
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD b. Loosen the upper bearing inner race2 completely and then tighten it to specification with a steering nut wrench3 .
^
Steering nut wrench
90890-01444
YM-A9409-7 w
Do not overtighten the upper bearing inner race.
Upper bearing inner race(final tightening torque)
7Nm(0.7m
• kg, 5.1ft
• lb) c. Check the steering head for looseness or binding by turning the front fork all the way in both directions. If any binding is felt, remove the lower bracket and check the bearing race .
Refer to “STEERING HEAD” in chapter 4. d. Hold the upper bearing inner race with a steering nut wrench and tighten the steering n u t 1 with a steering nut wrench2.
Steering nut wrench
90890-01403
YU-A9472
V
%
Steering nut
30Nm(3.0m
• kg, 21.7ft
• lb)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5. Install:
8headlight stay bracket
Refer to”HANDLE BRACKET AND
HEADLIGHT STAY BRACKET”in chapter 4.
8leg shield1,2
8front fork cover(left, right)
8front fork upper cover
Refer to”LEG SHIELD1,2".
3-43
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00151
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Check:
• inner tube
Damage/scratches -» Replace.
• oil seal
Oil leakage -» Replace.
3. Hold the scooter upright and apply the front
• brake.
4. Check:
• front fork operation
Push down hard on the handlebar several times and check if the front fork rebounds smoothly.
Rough movement -» Repair.
Refer to “FRONT FORK” in chapter 4.
3-44
CHECKING THE TIRES
EAS00163
CHECKING THE TIRES
The following procedure applies to both of the tires.
1. Check:
• tire pressure
Out of specification -> Regulate. rr\w«:»iwei
• The tire pressure should only be checked and regulated when the tire temperature equals the ambient air temperature.
• The tire pressure and the suspension must be adjusted according to the total weight (including cargo, rider, passenger and accessories) and the anticipated riding speed.
• Operation of an overloaded scooter could cause tire damage, an accident or an injury.
• NEVER OVERLOAD THE SCOOTER.
Basic weight
(with oil and a full fuel tank)
Maximum load*
Cold tire pressure
90 kg (198 lb)
175 kg (386 lb)
Front Rear
Up to 55 kg 175 kPa (1.75 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm
2
, 25 psi) kgf/cm
2
, 25 psi)
55 kg ~ 175 kg
175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm
2
, 25 psi)
175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm
2
, 25 psi)
* Total weight of rider, passenger, cargo and accessories w
It is dangerous to ride with a worn-out tire.
When the tire tread reaches the wear limit, replace the tire immediately.
3-45
CHECKING THE TIRES
2. Check:
• tire surfaces
Damage/wear -» Replace the tire.
Minimum tire tread depth
0.8mm(0.03in)
1 Tire tread depth
2 Sidewall
3 Wear indicator w
Do not use a tubeless tire on a wheel designed only for tube tires to avoid tire failure and personal injury from sudden deflation.
When using tube tires, be sure to install the correct tube.
Always replace a new tube tire and a new tube as a set.
To avoid pinching the tube, make sure the wheel rim band and tube are centered in the wheel groove.
Patching a punctured tube is not recommended. If it is absolutely necessary to do so, use great care and replace the tube as soon as possible with a good quality replacement.
A
B
Tire
Wheel
Tube wheel
Tubeless wheel
Tube tire only
Tube or tubeless tire
After extensive tests, the tires listed below have been approved by Yamaha
Motor Taiwan Co., Ltd. for this model.
The front and rear tires should always be by the same manufacturer and of the same design. No guarantee concerning handling characteristics can be given if a tire combination other than one approved by Yamaha is used on this scooter.
Front tire
Manufacturer Model
CHENG SHIN C6022
3-46
Rear tire
Manufacturer Model
CHENG SHIN C6022
Size
120/90-10 57J
Size
120/90-10 57J
CHECKING THE TIRES
CHK
ADJ
< & w
New tires have a relatively low grip on the road surface until they have been slightly worn. Therefore, approximately 100 km should be traveled at normal speed before any high-speed riding is done.
NOTE:
For tires with a direction of rotation mark 1 :
8 Install the tire with the mark pointing in the direction of wheel rotation.
8 Align the m a r k 2 with the valve installation point.
3-47
CHECKING THE WHEELS/
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00168
CHECKING THE WHEELS
The following procedure applies to both of the wheels.
1. Check:
• wheel
Damage/out-of-round -» Replace.
FflWUzWIgM
Never attempt to make any repairs to the wheel.
NOTE:
After a tire or wheel has been changed or replaced, always balance the wheel.
3-48
EAS00170
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE
CABLES
The following procedure applies to all of the inner and outer cables.
FflWUzWIgM
Damaged outer cable may cause the cable to corrode and interfere with its movement.
Replace damaged outer cable and inner cables as soon as possible.
1. Check:
• outer cable
Damage -» Replace.
2. Check:
• cable operation
Rough movement -» Lubricate.
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil or a suitable cable lubricant
NOTE:
Hold the cable end upright and pour a few drops of lubricant into the cable sheath or use a suitable lubricating device.
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS/
LUBRICATING THE CENTERSTAND
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00171
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal moving parts of the levers and pedals.
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
EAS00173
LUBRICATING THE CENTERSTAND
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal moving parts of the centerstand.
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
3-49
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
BATTERY INSTRUCTION
This is a sealed lype 12 volt battery. No liquid level inspection is ever needed and no refilling water will be required.
IMPORTANT:
• Never interfere with the sealed state of the battery.
•Check the charging condition with a voltmeter (Normal charging voltage should be above 12.8V)
•This battery may be installed in an vehicle only If it replaces a similar sealed type battery.
© ® A ® A
=LAMMABLES SHIELD EVES
A DANGER
• Do not use at the places near fire. Hydrogen gas generated from battery may cause fire and explosion.
•This 12V battery is only for starting engine. Do not apply for other uses.
• Keep out of the reach of children or the personnel who do not understand the manual. It may cause blindness or severe bum,
•When using the battery, wear safety glasses and rubber gloves. Sulfuric acid may cause blindness or severe bum,
EAS00179
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY w
Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas and contain electrolyte which is made of poisonous and highly caustic sulfuric acid.
Therefore, always follow these preventive measures:
8 Wear protective eye gear when handling or working near batteries.
8 Charge batteries in a well-ventilated area.
8 Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or open flames (e.g., welding equipment, lighted cigarettes).
8 DO NOT SMOKE when charging or handling batteries.
8 KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTE
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
8 Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte as it can cause severe burns or permanent eye injury.
FIRST AID IN CASE OF BODILY CONTACT:
EXTERNAL
8 Skin — Wash with water.
8 Eyes — Flush with water for 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
INTERNAL
8 Drink large quantities of water or milk followed with milk of magnesia, beaten egg or vegetable oil. Get immediate medical attention. c C
This is a sealed battery. Never remove the sealing caps because the balance between cells will not be maintained and battery performance will deteriorate.
Charging time, charging amperage and charging voltage for an MF battery are different from those of conventional batteries. The MF battery should be charged as explained in the charging method illustrations. If the battery is overcharged, the electrolyte level will drop considerably. Therefore, take special care when charging the battery.
3-50
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
NOTE:
Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not possible to check the charge state of the battery by measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte.
Therefore, the charge of the battery has to be checked by measuring the voltage at the battery terminals.
1. Remove:
8battery cover
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”.
3-51
2. Disconnect:
8battery leads
(from the battery terminals) c C
First, disconnect the negative battery lead
1 , and then the positive battery lead 2 .
3. Remove:
8battery
4. Check:
8battery charge
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Connect a digital circuit tester to the battery terminals.
Digital circuit tester
90890-03174
Positive tester probe -» positive battery terminal
Negative tester probe -» negative battery terminal
NOTE:
8 The charge state of an MF battery can be checked by measuring its open-circuit voltage (i.e., the voltage when the positive terminal is disconnected).
8 No charging is necessary when the opencircuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V.
13.0
12.5
12.0
11.5 j -
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
CHK
ADJ
< &
Relationship between the open-circuit voltage and the charging time at 20 C b. Check the charge of the battery, as shown in the charts and the following example.
5 6.5 10
Charging time (hours)
These values vary with the temperature, the condition of the battery plates, and the electrolyte level.
Example c. Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V d. Charging time = 6.5 hours e. Charge of the battery = 20 ~ 30%
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
14
13
Ambient temperature
20 C
11
10
100 75 50 30 25 20 0
Charging condition of the battery (%)
3-52
5. Charge:
8battery
(refer to the appropriate charging method illustration) w
Do not quick charge a battery. c C
Never remove the MF battery sealing caps.
Do not use a high-rate battery charger since it forces a high-amperage current into the battery quickly and can cause battery overheating and battery plate damage.
If it is impossible to regulate the charging current on the battery charger, be careful not to overcharge the battery.
When charging a battery, be sure to remove it from the scooter. (If charging has to be done with the battery mounted on the scooter, disconnect the negative battery lead from the battery terminal.)
To reduce the chance of sparks, do not plug in the battery charger until the battery charger leads are connected to the battery.
Before removing the battery charger lead clips from the battery terminals, be sure to turn off the battery charger.
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
CHK
ADJ
< &
Make sure the battery charger lead clips are in full contact with the battery terminal and that they are not shorted. A corroded battery charger lead clip may generate heat in the contact area and a weak clip spring may cause sparks.
If the battery becomes hot to the touch at any time during the charging process, disconnect the battery charger and let the battery cool before reconnecting it.
Hot batteries can explode!
As shown in the following illustration, the open-circuit voltage of an MF battery stabilizes about 30 minutes after charging has been completed. Therefore, wait
30 minutes after charging is completed before measuring the open-circuit voltage.
3-53
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
Charging method using a variable-current (voltage) charger
Charger
Ammeter
Measure the open-circuit voltage prior to charging.
NOTE:
Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its opencircuit voltage.
Set the charging voltage to 16-17 V.
(If the charging voltage is lower charging will be insufficient, if it is higher, the battery will be over-charged.)
Set the timer to the charging time determined by the opencircuit voltage.
Refer to “CHECKING AND
CHARGING THE BATTERY”.
If the amperage does not exceed the standard charging amperage after 5 minutes, replace the battery.
If the required charging time exceeds 5 hours, it is advisable to check the charging amperage after 5 hours. If there is any change in the amperage, readjust the voltage to obtain the standard charging amperage.
Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its open-circuit voltage.
12.8 V ~ Charging is complete.
12.0 ~ 12.7 V ~ Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V ~ Replace the battery.
3-54
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
Charging method using a constant voltage charger
Measure the open-circuit voltage prior to charging.
NOTE:
Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its opencircuit voltage.
Connect a charger and ammeter to the battery and start charging.
YES
Is the amperage higher than the standard charging amperage written on the battery?
NO
Charge the battery until the charging voltage reaches 15 V.
NOTE:
Set the charging time to a maximum of 20 hours. i
Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its open-circuit voltage.
12.8 V ~ Charging is complete.
12.0 ~ 12.7 V ~ Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V ~ Replace the battery.
Voltmeter
N -
V c C
Constant amperage chargers are not suitable for charging MF batteries. i
This type of battery charger cannot charge an MF battery. A variablevoltage charger is recommended.
1
Charger
I
3-55
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY/
CHECKING THE FUSE
CHK
ADJ
< &
6. Install:
7.
8battery
Connect:
8battery leads
(to the battery terminals) c C
First, connect the positive battery lead
1, and then the negative battery lead 2.
8 After installing the battery, be sure to turn the main switch from “ON” to “OFF” three times in 3 seconds intervals to initialize the idle speed control system.
8. Check:
8 battery terminals
Dirt -» Clean with a wire brush.
Loose connection -» Connect properly.
9. Lubricate:
8 battery terminals
Recommended lubricant
Dielectric grease
10.Install:
8battery cover
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”.
EAS00181
CHECKING THE FUSE
The following procedure applies to all of the fuse. c C
To avoid a short circuit, always set the main switch to “OFF” when checking or replacing a fuse.
1. Remove:
8battery cover
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”.
3-56
CHECKING THE FUSE
2. Check:
8fuse
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and check the continuity.
NOTE:
Set the pocket tester selector to “ × 1”.
Pocket tester
90890-03112(YU-03112-C)
^ b. If the pocket tester indicates “∞”, replace the fuse.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3. Replace:
8blown fuse
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Set the main switch to “OFF”. b. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage rating. c. Set on the switches to verify if the electrical circuit is operational. d. If the fuse immediately blows again, check the electrical circuit.
Fuse
Main
Amperage rating
15A 1
Q’ty
3-57 w
Never use a fuse with an amperage rating other than that specified. Improvising or using a fuse with the wrong amperage rating may cause extensive damage to the electrical system, cause the lighting and ignition systems to malfunction and could possibly cause a fire. c C
After removing and installing the main fuse, be sure to turn the main switch from “ON” to “OFF” three times in 3 seconds intervals to initialize the idle speed control system.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4. Install:
8battery cover
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”.
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB
EAS00182
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB
1. Remove:
8headlight unit
2. Disconnect:
8headlight lead coupler
3. Remove:
8dust b o o t 1
8headlight bulb holder2
8headlight bulb3 w
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot, keep flammable products and your hands away from the bulb until it has cooled down.
4. Install:
8headlight bulb New
Secure the new headlight bulb with the headlight bulb holder. c C
Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise the transparency of the glass, the life of the bulb and the luminous flux will be adversely affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled, thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquer thinner.
5. Install :
8headlight bulb holder
6. Install:
8dust boot
7. Connect:
8headlight lead coupler
8. Install:
8headlight unit
3-58
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM
CHK
ADJ
< &
EAS00184
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM
1. Adjust: headlight beam (vertically)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a or b .
Direction a Headlight beam is raised.
Direction b Headlight beam is lowered.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2. Adjust: headlight beam (horizontally)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the adjusting screw2 in direction a or b .
Direction a Headlight beam moves to the right.
Direction b Headlight beam moves to the left.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3-59
CHAS (3^3^)
CHAPTER 4
CHASSIS
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE 4-1
FRONT WHEEL 4-2
FRONT BRAKE SHOE PLATE 4-3
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL 4-4
DISASSEMBLING THE BRAKE SHOE PLATE 4-4
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL 4-5
CHECKING THE SPEEDOMETER GEAR UNIT 4-6
CHECKING THE BRAKE 4-7
ASSEMBLING THE BRAKE SHOE PLATE 4-8
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT WHEEL 4-9
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL 4-10
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC BALANCE 4-11
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE 4-13
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL 4-14
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL 4-14
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL DRIVE HUB 4-15
CHECKING THE BRAKE 4-15
ASSEMBLING THE BRAKE SHOE PLATE 4-16
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL 4-18
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC BALANCE 4-18
FRONT FORK 4-19
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 4-21
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 4-21
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 4-23
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 4-24
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 4-26
HANDLEBAR 4-27
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR 4-29
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR 4-29
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR 4-30
STEERING HEAD 4-32
HANDLEBAR BRACKET AND HEADLIGHT STAY BRACKET 4-32
LOWER BRACKET 4-33
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET 4-34
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD 4-35
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD 4-36
CHAS (3^3^)
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 4-37
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 4-38
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 4-38
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 4-39
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00517
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHASSIS
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stop ring
Speedometer cable
Brake adjuster
Front brake cable
Adjusting pin
Wheel axle nut
Wheel axle
8 Collar
9 Front brake shoe plate
10 Front wheel
Job/Part
Removing the front wheel and brake
Remarks
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
NOTE:
Place the scooter on a suitable stand so that the front wheel is elevated.
1
1
1
1
1 Refer to”REMOVING THE FRONT
1 WHEEL and INSTALLING THE FRONT
1
1
1
1
WHEEL”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-1
EAS00518
FRONT WHEEL
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
Order Job/Part
Disassembling the front wheel
1 Oil seal
2 Bearing
3 Spacer
4 Bearing
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-2
FRONT BRAKE SHOE PLATE
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
Order Job/Part
Disassembling the front brake shoe plate
1 Brake shoe kit
2 Tension spring
3 Camshaft lever
4 Brake shoe wear indicator
5 Return spring
6 Brake camshaft/O-ring
7 Oil seal
8 Oil seal
9 Circlip
0 Plate washer q Speedometer clutch w Speedometer drive gear e Plate washer r Bushing t Oil seal y Speedometer driven gear u Plate washer
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1/1
1 Refer to”DISASSEMBLING THE
1 BRAKE SHOE PLATE” and “ASSEM-
1 BLING THE BRAKE SHOE PLATE”.
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-3
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00520
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the scooter on a suitable stand so that the front wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
8speedometer cable 1
8front brake c a b l e 2
8front wheel axle n u t 3
8front wheel a x l e 4
8collar
8front w h e e l 5
8front brake shoe plate 6
EAS00524
DISASSEMBLING THE BRAKE SHOE PLATE
1. Remove:
8front brake shoe kit
8camshaft lever
8brake shoe wear indicator
8return spring
8brake camshaft
2. Remove:
8circlip
8plate washer
8speedometer clutch
8speedometer drive gear
8plate washer
3. Remove:
8bushing
(with the special tool)
8speedometer driven gear
8plate washer
Meter gear bush tool
90890-01052
NOTE:
Remove the bushing from the brake shoe plate with the meter gear bush tool.
4-4
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
EAS00525
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Check:
• wheel axle
Roll the wheel axle on a flat surface.
Bends -» Replace.
Do not attempt to straighten a bent wheel axle.
2. Check:
• tire
• front wheel
Damage/wear -» Replace.
Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” and
“CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter
3.
3. Measure:
• radial wheel runout (T)
• lateral wheel runout @
Over the specified limits -» Replace.
Radial wheel runout limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Lateral wheel runout limit
1.0 mm(0.04 in)
4-5
4. Check:
• wheel bearings
Front wheel turns roughly or is loose -»
Replace the wheel bearings.
• oil seal
Damage/wear -» Replace.
5. Replace:
• wheel bearings New
• oil seal New
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Clean the outside of the front wheel hub. b. Remove the oil seal 1 with a flat-head screwdriver.
NOTE:
To prevent damaging the wheel, place a rag 2 between the screwdriver and the wheel surface. c. Remove the wheel bearings 4 with a general bearing puller3. d. Install the new wheel bearings and oil seal in the reverse order of disassembly.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
EAS00535
CHECKING THE SPEEDOMETER GEAR
UNIT
1. Check:
• speedometer clutch
Bends/damage/wear -» Replace.
2. Check:
• speedometer drive gear (T)
• speedometer driven gear ®
Damage/wear -» Replace.
4-6
(If
^
• •
•
B
" ' w
•—Q7\__ y j
'
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
12270603
EAS00536
CHECKING THE BRAKE
The following procedure applies to all of the brake shoes.
1. Check:
• brake shoe lining
Glazed areas -» Repair.
Sand the glazed areas with course sandpaper.
NOTE:
After sanding the glazed areas, clean the brake shoe with a cloth.
2. Measure:
• brake shoe lining thickness a
Out of specification ^Replace.
Brake shoe lining thickness limit
(minimum)
2.0 mm (0.08 in) w
Do not allow oil or grease to contact the brake shoes.
NOTE:
Replace the brake shoes as a set, if either is worn to the wear limit.
4-7
3. Measure:
• brake drum inside diameter b
Out of specification ^Replace the wheel.
Brake drum inside diameter limit
(maximum)
110.5 mm (4.35 in)
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
4. Check:
• brake drum inner surface
Oil deposits -» Clean.
Remove the oil with a rag soaked in lacquer thinner or solvent.
Scratches -» Repair.
Lightly and evenly polish the scratches with an emery cloth.
5. Check:
• brake camshaft
Damage/wear -» Replace.
4-8
EAS00537
ASSEMBLING THE BRAKE SHOE PLATE
1. Lubricate:
8brake camshaft
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
2. Install:
8brake camshaft 1
8spring
8brake shoe wear indicator 2
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Install the brake camshaft so its punch mark a is positioned as shown. b. Align the projection b on the brake shoe wear indicator with the notch in the brake camshaft. c. Check that the brake shoes are properly positioned.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
V \
) k V~
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^5^)
3. Install:
8 camshaft lever (T)
X I 8Nm(0.8m
• kg, 5.8ft
• lb)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Align the camshaft punch mark a and camshaft lever punch mark b is positioned as shown.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4. Install:
8 plate washer
8 speedometer driven gear
8 bushing
(with the special tool)
Meter gear bush tool
90890-01052 y
*JiL k P DBH1
EAS00538
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Install:
8wheel bearing(right)1 New
8spacer
8wheel bearing(left) New
8oil seal New
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Install the new wheel bearings and oil seal in the reverse order of disassembly. c C
Do not contact the wheel bearing inner race
1 or balls 2 . Contact should be made only with the outer race 3 .
NOTE:
Use a socket 4 that matches the diameter of the wheel bearing outer race and oil seal.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2. Install:
8brake shoe plate
Align the tab on the speedometer clutch with the slot in the wheel hub.
4-9
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00540
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Lubricate:
8wheel axle
8wheel bearings
8oil seal lips
8speedometer drive gear
8speedometer driven gear
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
2. Install:
8front w h e e l 1
NOTE:
Make sure the slot ® in the brake shoe plate fits over the stopper ® on the outer tube.
3. Tighten:
8 wheel axle nut
X I 48 Nm (4.8 m * kg, 34.7 ft * lb)
Make sure the brake cable is routed properly. c C
Before tightening the wheel axle nut, push down hard on the handlebar several times and check if the front fork rebounds smoothly.
4-10
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
EAS00548
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
8 After replacing the tire, wheel or both, the front wheel static balance should be adjusted.
8 Adjust the front wheel static balance with the brake disc installed.
1 . Remove:
8balancing weight(s)
4-11
2. Find:
8front wheel’s heavy spot
NOTE:
Place the front wheel on a suitable balancing stand.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Spin the front wheel. b. When the front wheel stops, put an “X at the bottom of the wheel.
1
” mark c. Turn the front wheel 90° so that the “X
1
” mark d. is positioned as shown.
Release the front wheel. e. When the wheel stops, put an “X
2
” mark at f. the bottom of the wheel.
Repeat steps (d) through (f) several times until all the marks come to rest at the same g. spot.
The spot where all the marks come to rest is the front wheel’s heavy spot “X”.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^%
3. Adjust:
8front wheel static balance
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Install a balancing weight 1 onto the rim exactly opposite the heavy spot “X”.
NOTE:
Start with the lightest weight. b. Turn the front wheel 90° so that the heavy spot is positioned as shown. c. If the heavy spot does not stay in that posid. tion, install a heavier weight.
Repeat steps (b) and (c) until the front wheel is balanced.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4. Check:
8front wheel static balance
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the front wheel and make sure it stays at each position shown. b. If the front wheel does not remain stationary at all of the positions, rebalance it.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4-12
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00555
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
Order Job/Part
Removing the rear wheel and brake
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
NOTE:
Place the scooter on a suitable stand so that the front wheel is elevated.
Muffler
1 Self lock nut/Plate washer
2 Brake adjuster
3 Spring
4 Rear brake cable
5 Adjusting pin
6 Rear wheel
7 Brake shoe kit
8 Tension spring
9 Plate washer
10 Camshaft lever
11 Indicator plate
12 Brake camshaft/O-ring
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL”in chapter
5.
2
1
1
1
1/2
1/1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-13
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00564
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the scooter on a suitable stand so that the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
8muffler
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL”in chapter
5.
3. Loosen:
8brake adjuster
4. Remove:
8wheel axle nut 1
8plate washer
8rear w h e e l 2
EAS00565
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Check:
• tire
• rear wheel
Damage/wear -» Replace.
Refer to”CHECKING THE TIRES ”and”
CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter 3.
2. Measure:
• radial wheel runout
• lateral wheel runout
Refer to”CHECKING THE FRONT
WHEEL”.
4-14
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00567
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL DRIVE HUB
1. Check:
• rear wheel drive hub
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
(If
^v-
/)>
~~~G77\-__
3^
12270603
EAS00569
CHECKING THE BRAKE
The following procedure applies to all of the brake shoes.
1. Check:
• brake shoe lining
Glazed areas -» Repair.
Sand the glazed areas with course sandpaper.
NOTE:
After sanding the glazed areas, clean the brake shoe with a cloth.
4-15
2. Measure:
• brake shoe lining thickness a
Out of specification -» Replace.
Brake shoe lining thickness limit
(minimum)
2.0 mm(0.08 in) w
Do not allow oil or grease to contact the brake shoes.
NOTE:
Replace the brake shoes as a set, if either is worn to the wear limit.
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
3. Measure:
• brake drum inside diameter b
Out of specification -» Replace the wheel.
Brake drum inside diameter limit
(maximum)
110.5 mm(4.35 in)
4. Check:
• brake drum inner surface
Oil deposits -» Clean.
Remove the oil with a rag soaked in lacquer thinner or solvent.
Scratches -» Repair.
Lightly and evenly polish the scratches with an emery cloth.
5. Check:
• brake camshaft
Damage/wear -» Replace.
EAS00570
ASSEMBLING THE BRAKE SHOE PLATE
1. Install:
8brake camshaft 1
8o-rings New
8brake shoe wear indicator 2
NOTE:
Lubricate the brake camshaft and o-rings with lithium-soap-based grease. w
After installing the brake camshaft and orings, remove any excess grease.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Install the brake camshaft 1 so its punch mark a is positioned as shown. b. Align the projection b on the brake shoe wear indicator with the notch in the brake shoe camshaft. c. Check that the brake shoes are properly positioned.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2. Tighten:
8brake camshaft bolt
10Nm(1.0m
* kg, 7.2ft
* lb)
4-16
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
3. Install:
8brake shoe k i t 1
8tension springs c C
Do not put lubricating oil on the brake lining.
Change the tension spring at the same time of changing the brake shoe.
Refer to the direction in the illustration when assembling the brake shoe and spring.
Refer to the illustration with regards to the assembly direction of tension spring, and do not let the spring hook and coil to be damaged by the pliers.
4-17
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00574
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Lubricate:
8wheel axle
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
2. Install:
• rear wheel
3. Tighten:
• plate washer
• wheel axle nut ©
X I 120Nm(12.0m
* kg, 86.8ft
* lb)
4. Install:
• muffler
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL”in chapter
5.
5. Adjust:
• brake lever free play
Refer to”ADJUSTING THE REAR
BRAKE” in chapter 3.
4-18
EAS00575
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
8 After replacing the tire, wheel or both, the rear wheel static balance should be adjusted.
8 Adjust the rear wheel static balance with the rear wheel drive hub installed.
1. Adjust:
8rear wheel static balance
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE FRONT
WHEEL STATIC BALANCE”.
EAS00646
FRONT FORK
FRONT FORK
CHAS (3^3^)
S& 45Nm(4.5m • kg, 32.5 ft • lb)
gR 30Nm(3.0m • kg, 21.7 ft • lb)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Job/Part
Removing the front fork legs
Front fork upper cover
Reflector
Front fork cover(left and right)
Front wheel
Cable guide
Cap bolt
O-ring
Lower bracket pinch bolt
Front fork leg
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”LEG SHIELD1,2 “ in chapter 3.
Refer to”FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE”.
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to”REMOVING THE FRONT
FORK LEGS” and “INSTALLING THE
FRONT FORK LEGS”
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-19
EAS00648
FRONT FORK C H A S (3^3^)
(D
3R 23Nm(2.3m • kg, 16.6 ft < lb)
Order Job/Part
Disassembling the front fork legs
Fork oil
1 Fork spring
2 Damper rod bolt/Copper washer
3 Damper rod
4 Rebound spring
5 Inner tube
6 Dust seal
7 Oil seal clip
8 Oil seal
9 Outer tube
Remarks
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Drain.
1
1/1
1
1
1 Refer to”DISASSEMBLING THE
1 FRONT FORK LEGS” and “ASSEM-
1 BLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS”
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-20
FRONT FORK
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00651
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the front fork legs.
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the scooter on a suitable stand so that the front wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
8front fork upper cover
8front fork cover (left and right)
Refer to “LEG SHIELD1,2”in chapter 3.
8front wheel
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE”.
3. Loosen:
8lower bracket pinch bolt 1
4. Remove:
8cap bolt 2
(with a 10 -mm hexagonal wrench3) w
Before loosening the lower bracket pinch bolt, support the front fork leg.
5. Remove:
8front fork leg
4-21
EAS00653
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the front fork legs.
1. Remove:
8fork spring 1
FRONT FORK
2. Drain:
8fork oil
3. Remove:
8damper rod assembly b o l t 1
NOTE:
While holding the damper rod with the damper rod holder 2 and T-handle3, loosen the damper rod assembly bolt.
/ •
Damper rod holder
90890-01294(YM-01300-1)
T-handle
90890-01326(YM-01326)
4. Remove:
8damper r o d 1
8spring
8inner t u b e 2
4-22
5. Remove:
8dust seal
8oil seal clip 1
(with a flat-head screwdriver) c C
Do not scratch the inner tube.
FRONT FORK
CHAS (3^%
6. Remove:
8oil s e a l 1 c C
Never reuse the oil seal.
8 R a g 2
EAS00656
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the front fork legs.
1. Check:
8 inner t u b e ®
8 outer tube (2)
Bends/damage/scratches -* Replace. w
Do not attempt to straighten a bent inner tube as this may dangerously weaken it.
4-23
2. Measure:
8 spring free length a
Out of specification -* Replace.
Spring free length
202.2mm(7.96in)
<Limit> :198.2mm(7.80in)
3. Check:
8 damper r o d ®
Damage/wear -* Replace.
Obstruction -* Blow out all of the oil passages with compressed air.
y
® <?
\J$^
(gfm;
\ ^
FRONT FORK
EAS00658
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the front fork legs.
NOTE:
8 When assembling the front fork leg, be sure to replace the following parts:
- oil seal
- dust seal
8 Before assembling the front fork leg, make sure all of the components are clean.
1. Install:
8damper rod assembly 1
8rebound spring 2 c C
Allow the damper rod assembly to slide slowly down the inner t u b e 3 until it protrudes from the bottom of the inner tube.
Be careful not to damage the inner tube.
2. Lubricate:
8inner tube’s outer surface
Recommended lubricant
Fork oil 10W or equivalent
3. Tighten:
8 Copper washer New
8 damper rod assembly bolt (T)
X I 23 Nm (2.3 m * kg, 16.6 ft * lb)
NOTE:
While holding the damper rod assembly with the damper rod holder 2 and T-handle 3 , tighten the damper rod assembly bolt.
Damper rod holder
90890-01294(YM-01300-1)
T-handle
90890-01326(YM-01326)
4-24
V •
FRONT FORK
CHAS (3^3^)
4. Install:
8oil seal 1 New
(with the fork seal driver weight 2 and adapter 3 )
^
Fork seal driver weight
90890-01367(YM-A9409-7)
Adapter
90890-01400(YM-A9409-3 ) c C
Make sure the numbered side of the oil seal faces up.
NOTE:
8 Before installing the oil seal, lubricate its lips with lithium soap base grease.
8 Lubricate the outer surface of the inner tube with fork oil.
8 Before installing the oil seal, cover the top of the front fork leg with a plastic bag 4 to protect the oil seal during installation.
5. Install:
8oil seal c l i p 1
NOTE:
Adjust the oil seal clip so that it fits into the outer tube’s groove.
4-25
6. Fill:
8front fork leg
(with the specified amount of the recommended fork oil)
*® Quantity (each front fork leg)
0.042 L (0.038 Imp qt, 0.046 US qt)
Recommended oil
Fork oil 10W or equivalent
4-26
FRONT FORK
CHAS (3^3^)
NOTE:
8 While filling the front fork leg, keep it upright.
8 After filling, slowly pump the front fork leg up and down to distribute the fork oil.
7. Install:
8fork spring 1
NOTE:
8 Install the spring with the smaller pitch facing down .
EAS00663
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the front fork legs.
1. Install:
• front fork leg
• o-ring New
• cap bolt
NOTE:
Pull up the inner tube until it stops, then install the cap bolt .
2. Tighten:
• cap bolt (T)
X | 45 Nm (4.5 m * kg, 32.5 ft * lb)
• lower bracket pinch bolt (2)
X | 30Nm(3.0m
* kg, 21.7ft
* lb)
EAS00664
HANDLEBAR
10 ^
HANDLEBAR
CHAS (3^3^)
Order Job/Part
Removing the handlebar
Front fork upper cover
Front fork cover(left and right)
Leg shield1,2
1 Rear view mirror(left and right)
2 Band
3 Front brake cable
4 Brake lever(right)
5 Front brake switch
6 Front turn signal light(right)
7 Front turn signal light bracket(right)
8 Handlebar switch(right)
9 Throttle cable
10 Throttle grip assembly
11 Rear brake cable
12 Brake lever(left)
13 Rear brake switch
4-27
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”LEG SHIELD1,2"in chapter 3.
1/1
2
1 Disconnect.
1
1
1
1
1
2 Disconnect.
1
1 Disconnect.
1
1
10 ^
HANDLEBAR
CHAS (3^3^)
Order
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Job/Part
Front turn signal light(left)
Front turn signal light bracket(left)
Handlebar switch(left)
Handlebar grip
Cap
Handlebar upper holder
Handlebar assembly
Remarks
Q’ty
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-28
4-29
HANDLEBAR
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00666
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR
1 . Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Remove:
8handlebar switch(right)1
8throttle grip assembly 2
NOTE:
While removing the handlebar holder assembly
(right), pull back the rubber cover.
3. Remove:
8handlebar switch(left)
8handlebar grip 1
8handlebar upper holder
NOTE:
Blow compressed air between the handlebar and the handlebar grip, and gradually push the grip off the handlebar.
EAS00668
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Check:
• handlebar ©
Bends/cracks/damage -» Replace.
Do not attempt to straighten a bent handlebar as this may dangerously weaken it.
HANDLEBAR
EAS00673
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Install:
8 handlebar ©
8 handlebar upper holders (2)
X I 28Nm(2.8m
* kg, 20.3ft
* lb)
C
First, tighten the bolts on the front side of the handlebar holders, and then on the rear side.
NOTE:
8 The upper handlebar holders should be installed with the arrow marks a facing forward A
8 Align the match marks b on the handlebar with the upper surface of the handlebar lower holder.
3. Install:
8 handlebar grip
NOTE:
Before installing the handlebar grip, apply the bond.
4-30
4. Install:
8 left handlebar switch 1
NOTE:
Align the projection a on the left handlebar switch with the hole b on the handlebar.
4-31
HANDLEBAR
5. Install:
8 throttle grip assembly 1
8 right handlebar switch 2
8 throttle cables 3
NOTE:
8 Align the projectiona on the right handlebar switch with the hole b on the handlebar.
8 Lubricate the inside of the throttle grip with a thin coat of lithium-soap-based grease and install it onto the handlebar4. w
Make sure the throttle grip operates smoothly.
6. Adjust:
8 throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE
CABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
Throttle cable free play (at the flange of the throttle grip)
1.5~3.5mm(0.06~0.14in)
STEERING HEAD
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00675
STEERING HEAD
HANDLEBAR BRACKET AND HEADLIGHT STAY BRACKET
®~.
P^23Nm(2.3m kg, 16.6 ft lb)
S^
>
48Nm(4.8m • kg, 34.7 ft • lb)
S^60Nm(6.0m • kg, 43.4 ft • lb) al4Nm(0.4m • kg, 2.9 ft • lb)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Order Job/Part
Removing the handlebar bracket and headlight stay bracket
Front fork upper cover
Front fork cover(left and right)
Leg shield1,2
Handlebar assembly
Speedometer cable
Speedometer
Headlight unit/Headlight body
Main switch
Horn
Rectifier/regulator
Turn signal relay
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Headlight stay bracket
Handlebar lower holder
Handlebar bracket
Q’ty
1
1
1/1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”LEG SHIELD1,2"in chapter 3.
Refer to”HANDLEBAR”.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-32
LOWER BRACKET
LOWER BRACKET
r V 30Nm(3.0m • kg, 21.7 ft • lb)f
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
Order Job/Part
Removing the lower bracket
Front fork upper cover
Front fork cover(left and right)
Leg shield1,2
Front wheel
Front fork legs
Handlebar assembly
Headlight stay bracket
Handlebar bracket
Front fender
Ring nut
Upper bearing inner race
Upper bearing
Lower bracket
Lower bearing
Upper bearing outer race
Lower bearing outer race
Lower bearing inner race
4-33
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”LEG SHIELD1,2"in chapter 3.
Refer to”FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE”.
Refer to”FRONT FORK”
Refer to”HANDLEBAR”.
Refer to”HANDLEBAR BRACKET AND
HEADLIGHT STAY BRACKET”
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Refer to”REMOVING THE LOWER
BRACKET” and “INSTALLING THE
STEERING HEAD”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-34
STEERING HEAD
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00678
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET
1. Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
2 . Remove:
8handlebar bracket 1
NOTE:
Remove the handlebar bracket by loosening the ring n u t 2 gradually.
3. Remove:
8ring nut 1
(with the ring nut wrench 2 )
Ring nut wrench
90890-01268
YU-01268
4 . Remove:
8upper bearing inner r a c e 1
(with the steering nut wrench2)
Steering nut wrench
90890-01444
YM-A9409-7 w
Securely support the lower bracket 3 so that there is no danger of it falling.
STEERING HEAD
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00682
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Wash:
8bearing balls
8bearing races
Recommended cleaning solvent
Kerosene
2. Check:
8bearing balls (T)
8bearing races (2)
Damage/pitting -» Replace.
4-35
3. Replace:
8bearing balls
8bearing races
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Remove the bearing races from the steering head pipe with a long rod 1 and hammer. b. Remove the bearing race from the front fork assembly with a floor chisel 2 and hammer. c. Install a new bearing races. c C
If the bearing race is not installed properly, the steering head pipe could be damaged.
NOTE:
Always replace the balls and bearing races as a set.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4. Check:
8lower bracket
(along with the steering stem)
Bends/cracks/damage -» Replace.
STEERING HEAD
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00684
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Lubricate:
8bearing balls 1
8bearing races
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
2. Install:
8lower bracket 1
8upper bearing inner r a c e 2
(with the steering nut wrench3)
Upper bearing inner race
7Nm(0.7m • kg, 5.1ft
• lb) f*
Steering nut wrench
90890-01444
YM-A9409-7
3. Install:
8ring nut 1
(with the steering nut wrench2)
V
%
Ring nut
30Nm(3.0m
• kg, 21.7ft
• lb)
Steering nut wrench
90890-01403
YU-A9472
4. Install:
8handlebar bracket 1
NOTE:
Align the handlebar bracket across rod a on the lower bracket concave b .
5. Tighten:
• handlebar bracket nut
4-36
\ | 60Nm(6.0m
* kg, 43.4ft
* lb)
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00685
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
Order Job/Part
Removing the rear shock absorber assembly
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
2
3
4
Front cover
Side cover(left)
Rear shock absorber assembly upper nut
Rear shock absorber assembly upper bolt
Rear shock absorber assembly lower bolt
Rear shock absorber assembly
1
1
1
1
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”in chapter 3.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-37
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
EAS00692
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
1 . Stand the scooter on a level surface. w
Securely support the scooter so that there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the scooter on a suitable stand so that the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
8front cover
8side cover(left)
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”in chapter 3.
3. Remove:
8rear shock absorber nut(upper)
8rear shock absorber bolt(upper)
8rear shock absorber bolt(lower)
4-38
EAS00695
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
1. Check:
• rear shock absorber rod
Bend/damage -» Replace the rear shock absorber assembly.
• rear shock absorber
Oil leak -» Replace the rear shock absorber assembly.
• spring
Damage/wear -» Replace the rear shock absorber assembly.
• bushing
Damage/wear -» Replace.
• dust seal
Damage/wear -» Replace.
• bolts
Bends/damage/wear -» Replace.
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
CHAS (3^3^)
EAS00698
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK AB-
SORBER ASSEMBLY
1. Install:
• rear shock absorber assembly
2. Tighten:
• rear shock absorber assembly upper nut
X | 30Nm(3.0m
* kg, 21.7ft
* lb)
• rear shock absorber assembly lower bolt
X | 16Nm(1.6m
* kg, 11.6ft
* lb)
3. Install:
• side cover(left)
• front cover
Refer to”SIDE COVERS AND TAIL/
BRAKE LIGHT”in chapter 3.
4-39
ENG
% m
CHAPTER 5
ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL 5-1
LEADS, HOSES AND MUFFLER 5-1
ENGINE 5-3
INSTALLING THE ENGINE 5-4
CYLINDER HEAD 5-5
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD 5-7
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD 5-9
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD 5-10
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT 5-13
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT 5-14
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT 5-15
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND ROCKER ARM
SHAFTS 5-16
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN, CAMSHAFT SPROCKET, AND
TIMING CHAIN GUIDES 5-17
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER 5-18
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER ARMS 5-19
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS 5-20
REMOVING THE VALVES 5-22
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES 5-24
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS 5-26
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS 5-28
INSTALLING THE VALVES 5-29
CYLINDER AND PISTON 5-31
REMOVING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON 5-32
CHECKING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON 5-33
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS 5-35
CHECKING THE PISTON PIN 5-36
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN GUIDE 5-37
INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER 5-37
BELT DRIVE 5-39
V-BELT CASE COVER 5-39
KICKSTARTER 5-40
INSTALLING THE KICKSTARTER 5-41
V-BELT AND PRIMARY/SECONDARY SHEAVE 5-42
SECONDARY SHEAVE 5-43
REMOVING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE 5-44
ENG
% m
REMOVING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE AND V-BELT 5-44
DISASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE 5-45
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SHOES 5-45
CHECKING THE V-BELT 5-46
CHECKING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE 5-46
CHECKING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE WEIGHTS 5-47
CHECKING THE SLIDER 5-47
CHECKING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE 5-47
ASSEMBLING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE 5-48
ASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE 5-49
INSTALLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE, V-BELT AND PRIMARY
SHEAVE 5-50
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO 5-53
STATOR COIL ASSEMBLY 5-53
STARTER CLUTCH 5-55
REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO 5-56
REMOVING THE STARTER CLUTCH 5-57
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH 5-58
INSTALLING THE STARTER CLUTCH 5-59
INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO 5-59
OIL PUMP 5-61
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP 5-62
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP 5-63
INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP 5-63
TRANSMISSION 5-64
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION 5-65
CRANKSHAFT 5-66
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY 5-66
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE 5-68
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY 5-69
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING ROD 5-69
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE 5-70
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN AND TIMING CHAIN
GUIDE(INTAKE SIDE) 5-71
CHECKING THE BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS 5-71
CHECKING THE CIRCLIPS AND WASHERS 5-71
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT 5-72
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE 5-72
EAS00188
ENGINE REMOVAL
LEADS, HOSES AND MUFFLER
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG %m
ENGINE
r V 10Nm(1.0m • kg, 7.2 ft* lb)
r V 10Nm(1.0m • kg, 7.2 ft* lb)
Order Job/Part
Removing the leads, hoses and muffler
Front cover/Single seat/Trunk
Battery cover/Battery
Side cover(left and right)
Footrest board
Coolant
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
1
2
Rear brake cable/Adjuster/Pin
Throttle body and fuel injector
Starter motor
Conduit hose
Coolant temperature sensor coupler
1
1
Drain.
Refer to”CHANGING THE COOLANT”in chapter 3.
Refer to”REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE”in chapter 4.
Refer to”THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL
INJECTOR”in chapter 7.
Refer to”STARTER MOTOR”in chapter
8.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
5-1
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG %m r^10Nm(1.0m • kg, 7.2 ft* lb)
1 * 10Nm(1.0m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
Order
3
4
5
6
7
8
Job/Part
Crankshaft position sensor/Stator assembly coupler
Ignition primary coil coupler
Air filter assembly/Breather hose
Bracket
Muffler
Gasket
Q’ty
1/1 Disconnect.
Remarks
1
1/1
1
1
1
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-2
EAS00191
ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG %m
Order Job/Part
5-3
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Place a suitable stand under the frame and engine.
Refer to”INSTALLING THE ENGINE”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-4
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
% m
EAS00192
INSTALLING THE ENGINE
1. Install:
8engine 1
8engine mounting b o l t 2
8engine mounting n u t 3
NOTE:
8 Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the unthreaded portion of the engine mounting bolt shaft.
8 Do not fully tighten the engine mounting bolt..
2. Install:
• rear shock absorber assembly lower bolt ®
NOTE:
Do not fully tighten the bolt.
3. Tighten:
• engine mounting bolt
X I 58Nm(5.8m
* kg, 42.0ft
* lb)
• rear shock absorber assembly lower bolt
\ | 16Nm(1.6m
* kg, 11.6ft
* lb)
EAS00221
CYLINDER HEAD n^10Nm(1.0m« kg, 7.2 ft* lb)
I
4 .
i ^ \ 7
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG %m
P^9Nm(0.9m • kg, 6.5 ft • lb)
P|^j8Nm(0.8m • kg, 5.8 ft • lb)
«13Nm(1.3m • kg, 9.4 ft • lb)
[ \ 30Nm(3.0m • kg, 21.7 ft • lb)
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
Order Job/Part
Removing the cylinder head
Radiator
Thermostat
Water pump
Muffler/Bracket
Intake manifold/O-ring
Joint/O-ring
Spark plug cap
Ignition coil
Spark plug
Coolant temperature sensor
Cylinder head cover
O-ring
Timing chain tensioner
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”COOLING SYSTEM”in chapter
6.
5-5
1/1
1/1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL”.
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG
% m
P^9Nm(0.9m • kg, 6.5 ft • lb)
«13Nm(1.3m • kg, 9.4 ft • lb)
Order Job/Part
10 Timing chain tensioner gasket
11 Camshaft sprocket
12 Bolt
13 Nut
14 Plate
15 Cylinder head
16 Cylinder head gasket
17 Dowel pin
Remarks
Q’ty
1
1 Refer to”REMOVING THE CYLINDER
2 HEAD” and “INSTALLING THE CYLIN-
4 DER HEAD”.
1
1
1
2
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-6
5-7
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG %m
EAS00225
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD
1. Remove :
8V-belt case cover
8Refer to “BELT DRIVE”.
8cylinder head cover
2. Align:
8“I” mark a on the AC magneto rotor
(with the stationary pointer b on the crankcase cover)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the primary fixed sheave counterclockwise. b. When the piston is at TDC on the compression stroke, align the “I” mark c on the camshaft sprocket with the mark d on the plate.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3. Loosen:
8timing chain tensioner cap bolt
8camshaft sprocket bolt 1
While holding the crank bolt with a wrench2, remove the camshaft sprocket bolt. f,
Rotor holding tool
90890-01235
YU-01235
5-8
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG %m
4. Remove:
8timing chain tensioner
(along with the gasket)
8camshaft sprocket 1
8timing chain 2
NOTE:
8 To prevent the timing chain from falling into the crankcase, fasten it with a wire.
5. Remove:
8cylinder head
NOTE:
8 Loosen the nuts in the proper sequence as shown.
8 Loosen each nut 1/2 of a turn at a time. After all of the nuts are fully loosened, remove them.
5-9
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG %m
EAS00227
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD
1. Eliminate:
8combustion chamber carbon deposits
(with a rounded scraper)
NOTE:
Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damaging or scratching:
• spark plug bore thread
• valve seats
2. Check:
• cylinder head
Damage/scratches -» Replace.
3. Measure:
• cylinder head warpage
Out of specification -» Resurface the cylinder head.
Maximum cylinder head warpage
0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Place a straightedge 1 and a thickness gauge 2 across the cylinder head. b. Measure the warpage. c. If the limit is exceeded, resurface the cylinder head as follows. d. Place a 400 ~ 600 grit wet sandpaper on the surface plate and resurface the cylinder head using a figure-eight sanding pattern.
NOTE:
To ensure an even surface, rotate the cylinder head several times.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG %m
EAS00231
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD
1. Install:
• gasket New
• dowel pins
2. Install:
• cylinder head
3. Tighten:
• cylinder head nuts
X | 10 Nm (1.0 m * kg, 7.2 ft * lb)
• cylinder head bolts
X | 10 Nm (1.0 m * kg, 7.2 ft * lb)
NOTE:
• Lubricate the cylinder head nuts with engine oil.
• Tighten the cylinder head nuts in the proper tightening sequence as shown and torque them in two stages
• cylinder head tightening sequence
(1 -» 2 -» 3 4 -» 2 -» 5 -» 6)
5-10
4. Install:
8camshaft sprocket
8timing chain
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Turn the primary pulley counterclockwise. b. Align the “I” mark a on the AC magneto c. rotor with the stationary pointer b on the crankcase cover.
Align the “I” mark c on the camshaft sprocket with the stationary pointer d on the plate. d. Install the timing chain onto the camshaft sprocket, and then install the camshaft sprocket onto the camshaft.
NOTE:
8 When installing the camshaft sprocket, be sure to keep the timing chain as tight as possible on the exhaust side.
8 Align the slot on the camshaft with the tab
5-11
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG %m c C
Do not turn the crankshaft when installing the camshaft to avoid damage or improper valve timing. e. While holding the camshaft, temporarily tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt. f. Remove the wire from the timing chain.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5. Install
8camshaft sprocket bolt 1
6. Install:
8timing chain tensioner gasket New
8timing chain tensioner
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Remove the cap bolt 1 and spring 2 . b. Release the timing chain tensioner one-way cam 3 and push the timing chain tensioner rod 4 all the way into the timing chain tensioner housing. c. Install the timing chain tensioner and gasket 5 onto the cylinder.
V
%
Timing chain tensioner bolt
9 Nm (0.9 m • kg, 6.5 ft • lb) d. Install the springs 2 and cap bolt 1 .
Cap bolt
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • lb)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG
% m
7. Turn:
8crankshaft
(several turns counterclockwise)
8. Check:
8“I” mark a
Align the “I” mark on the AC magneto rotor with the stationary pointer b on the crankcase cover.
8“I” mark c
Align the “I” mark on the camshaft sprocket with the stationary pointer d on the plate.
Out of alignment -» Correct.
Refer to the installation steps above.
5-12
9. Tighten:
8camshaft sprocket bolt
X I 30 Nm (3.0 m * kg, 21.7 ft * lb)
C
Be sure to tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt to the specified torque to avoid the possibility of the bolts coming loose and damaging the engine.
10. Measure:
8valve clearance
Out of specification -» Adjust.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE
CLEARANCE” in chapter 3.
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
ENG
% m
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Order Job/Part
Removing the rocker arms and camshaft
Cylinder head
Camshaft
Rocker arm shaft(intake)
Rocker arm shaft(exhaust)
Rocker arm(intake)
Rocker arm(exhaust)
Collar
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
1
2
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-13
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
ENG
% m
EAS00202
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAM-
SHAFT
1. Remove:
8intake rocker arm shaft
8exhaust rocker arm shaft
8intake rocker arm
8exhaust rocker arm
8collar
NOTE:
Remove the rocker arm shafts with the clip plier.
2. Remove:
8camshaft 1
NOTE:
Remove the camshaft with the slide hammer bolt.
Slide hammer bolt
90890-01085
YU-01083-2
Weight
90890-01084
YU-01083-3
5-14
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
ENG
EAS00205
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT
1. Check:
• camshaft bushings
Damage/wear -» Replace.
2. Check:
• camshaft lobes
Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches -*
Replace the camshaft.
® m§> rgrxn^
X \
11151001
3. Measure:
• camshaft lobe dimensions a and b
Out of specification -* Replace the camshaft.
Camshaft lobe dimension limit
Intake a30.158~30.258mm
(1.1873~1.1913 in)
<Limit>:30.058mm (1.1834 in) b25.082~25.182mm
(0.9875~0.9914 in)
<Limit>:24.982mm (0.9835 in)
Exhaust a30.158~30.258mm
(1.1873~1.1913 in)
<Limit>:30.058mm (1.1834 in) b25.020~25.120mm
(0.9850~0.9890 in)
<Limit>:24.920mm (0.9811 in)
4. Check:
• camshaft oil passage
Obstruction -* Blow out with compressed air.
5-15
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
EAS00206
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND
ROCKER ARM SHAFTS
The following procedure applies to all of the rocker arms and rocker arm shafts.
1. Check:
• rocker arm (camshaft touch surface © )
• rocker arm (valve touch surface ® )
Damage/wear -» Replace.
2. Check:
• rocker arm shaft
Blue discoloration/excessive wear/pitting/ scratches -» Replace or check the lubrication system.
3. Check:
• camshaft lobe
Excessive wear -» Replace the camshaft.
4. Measure:
• rocker arm inside diameter a
Out of specification -» Replace.
Rocker arm inside diameter
10 ~ 10.015 mm (0.3937 ~ 0.3943 in)
<Limit>:10.030mm (0.3949 in)
5-16
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
5. Measure:
• rocker arm shaft outside diameter a
Out of specification -» Replace.
Rocker arm shaft outside diameter
9.981 ~ 9.991 mm (0.3930 ~ 0.3933 in)
<Limit>:9.950mm (0.3917 in)
6. Calculate:
• rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance
NOTE:
Calculate the clearance by subtracting the rocker arm shaft outside diameter from the rocker arm inside diameter.
Above 0.034 mm (0.0013 in) -» Replace the defective part(s).
Rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance
0.009 ~ 0.034 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0013 in)
EAS00207
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN, CAMSHAFT
SPROCKET, AND TIMING CHAIN GUIDES
5-17
1. Check:
• timing chain
Damage/stiffness -» Replace the timing chain and camshaft sprocket as a set.
2. Check:
• camshaft sprocket
More than 1/4 tooth wear a -» Replace the camshaft sprocket and the timing chain as a set. a 1/4 tooth
b Correct
(T) Timing chain roller
(2) Camshaft sprocket
3. Check:
• timing chain guide (exhaust side)
• timing chain guide (intake side)
Damage/wear -» Replace the defective part(s).
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
EAS00210
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
1. Check:
• timing chain tensioner
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
2. Check:
• one-way cam operation
Rough movement -» Replace the timing chain tensioner.
3. Check:
• cap bolt
• o-ring New
• spring
• one-way cam
• gasket New
• timing chain tensioner rod
Damage/wear -» Replace the defective part(s).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Removing the spring and cap bolt. b. c. d.
Return cam chain tensioner one way cam.
Press tensioner rod to the cam chain tensioner housing.
Installing the spring and cap bolt.
Loosen the front end of cam chain tensioner slowly. e. Make sure to return to the front end of cam chain tensioner.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Rough movement -» Replace the timing chain tensioner.
5-18
THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
ENG %m
EAS00220
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER
ARMS
1 . Lubricate:
8camshaft 1
Recommended lubricant
Camshaft
Molybdenum disulfide oil
Camshaft bearing
Engine oil
2. Lubricate:
8rocker arm shafts
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide oil
3. Install:
8exhaust rocker arm 1
8collar 2
8exhaust rocker arm shaft 3
NOTE:
Make sure the exhaust rocker arm shaft is completely pushed into the cylinder head.
4. Install:
8intake rocker arm 1
8collar 2
8intake rocker arm shaft 3
NOTE:
Make sure the intake rocker arm shaft is completely pushed into the cylinder head.
5-19
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
% m
EAS00236
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
Order
1
2
3
7
8
9
Valve pad
Valve cotter
Valve spring retainer
4 Valve spring
5 Valve(intake)
6 Valve(exhaust)
Valve stem seal
Valve stem seat
Valve guide
Job/Part
Removing the valves and valve springs
Cylinder head
Rocker arms
Rocker arm shafts
Camshaft
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”CYLINDER HEAD”.
Refer to”REMOVING THE ROCKER
ARMS AND CAMSHAFT” and “INSTALL-
ING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER
ARMS”.
3
6
3
3
2 Refer to”REMOVING THE VALVES” and
1 “INSTALLING THE VALVES”.
3
3
3
5-20
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
% m
Order Job/Part
Q’ty
Remarks
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-21
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG %m
EAS00237
REMOVING THE VALVES
The following procedure applies to all of the valves and related components.
NOTE:
Before removing the internal parts of the cylinder head (e.g., valves, valve springs, valve seats), make sure the valves properly seal.
1. Remove:
8valve pad 1
NOTE:
Make a note of the position of each valve pad so that they can be reinstalled in their original place.
2. Check:
• valve sealing
Leakage at the valve seat -» Check the valve face, valve seat, and valve seat width.
Refer to “CHECKING THE VALVE
SEATS”.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Pour a clean solvent a into the intake and exhaust ports. b. Check that the valves properly seal.
NOTE:
There should be no leakage at the valve seat
© .
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-22
3 . Remove: valve cotters 1
NOTE:
Remove the valve cotters by compressing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor and the valve spring compressor attachment 2 .
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS yValve spring compressor
90890-04019
YM-04019
Valve spring compressor attachment
90890-04148
YM-04148
4 . Remove:
8valve spring retainer 1
8valve spring 2
8valve stem seal 3
8valve spring seat 4
8valve 5
NOTE:
Identify the position of each part very carefully so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
5-23
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
EAS00239
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE
GUIDES
The following procedure applies to all of the valves and valve guides.
1 . Measure:
8valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance =
Valve guide inside diameter a -
Valve stem diameter b
Out of specification -* Replace the valve guide.
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance
Intake
0.010 ~ 0.037 mm(0.0004~0.0015 in)
<Limit>: 0.08 mm(0.0031 in)
Exhaust
0.025 ~ 0.052 mm(0.001~0.002 in)
<Limit>: 0.10 mm(0.0039 in)
2. Replace:
8valve guide
NOTE:
To ease valve guide removal and installation, and to maintain the correct fit, heat the cylinder head to 100°C (212°F) in an oven.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Remove the valve guide with the valve guide remover 1 . b. Install the new valve guide with the valve guide installer 2 and valve guide remover
1 . c. After installing the valve guide, bore the valve guide with the valve guide reamer 3 to obtain the proper valve-stem-to-valveguide clearance.
NOTE:
After replacing the valve guide, reface the valve seat.
Valve guide remover (4.0 mm)
90890-04111(YM-04111)
Valve guide installer (4.0 mm)
90890-04112(YM-04112)
Valve guide reamer (4.0 mm)
90890-04113(YM-04113)
5-24
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
% m
3. Eliminate:
• carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
4. Check:
• valve face
Pitting/wear -* Grind the valve face.
• valve stem end
Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the body of the valve stem -* Replace the valve.
O D t E
5. Measure:
• valve margin thickness a
Out of specification -* Replace the valve.
Valve margin thickness
0.9~1.1mm(0.0354~0.0433in)
6. Measure:
• valve stem runout
Out of specification -* Replace the valve.
NOTE:
• If the valve is removed or replaced, always replace the oil seal.
Valve stem runout
0.01 mm(0.0004 in)
5-25
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
EAS00240
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS
The following procedure applies to all of the valves and valve seats.
1. Eliminate:
• carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
2. Check:
• valve seat
Pitting/wear -* Replace the cylinder head.
3. Measure:
• valve seat width a
Out of specification -* Replace the cylinder head.
Valve seat width
Intake: 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm (0.0354 ~
0.0433 in)
<Limit>: 1.6 mm(0.063 in)
Exhaust: 0.9 ~1.1 mm
(0.0354~0.0433 in)
<Limit>: 1.6 mm(0.063 in)
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T a. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) b onto the valve face. b. c.
Install the valve into the cylinder head.
Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear impresd. sion.
Measure the valve seat width.
NOTE:
Where the valve seat and valve face contacted one another, the blueing will have been removed.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-26
4. Lap:
8valve face
8valve seat
NOTE:
After replacing the cylinder head or replacing the valve and valve guide, the valve seat and valve face should be lapped.
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
X"7
V N\ a
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Apply a coarse lapping compound a to the valve face. c C
Do not let the lapping compound enter the gap between the valve stem and the valve guide.
^ b. Apply molybdenum disulfide oil onto the valve stem. c. Install the valve into the cylinder head. d. Turn the valve until the valve face and valve seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of the lapping compound.
NOTE:
For the best lapping results, lightly tap the valve seat while rotating the valve back and forth between your hands. e. Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve face and repeat the above steps. f. After every lapping procedure, be sure to clean off all of the lapping compound from g. the valve face and valve seat.
Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) b onto the valve face. h. i.
Install the valve into the cylinder head.
Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear impression. j . Measure the valve seat width again. If the valve seat width is out of specification, reface and lap the valve seat.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-27
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
EAS00241
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS
The following procedure applies to all of the valve springs.
1. Measure:
• valve spring free length a
Out of specification -» Replace the valve spring.
Valve spring free length
Intake valve spring
39.35 mm (1.5492 in)
<Limit>: 37.38 mm (1.4717 in)
Exhaust valve spring
41.57 mm (1.6366 in)
<Limit>: 39.49 mm (1.5547 in)
2. Measure:
• compressed valve spring force a
Out of specification -» Replace the valve spring. b Installed length
Compressed valve spring force (installed)
Intake valve spring
9 1 . 1 ~ 1 0 4 . 9 N ( 9 . 3 ~ 1 0 . 7 k g ,
20.48~23.58lb) at 28mm(1.1024in)
Exhaust valve spring
1 0 7 . 9 ~ 1 2 4 . 1 N ( 1 1 . 0 ~ 1 2 . 7 k g ,
24.26~27.90lb) at 30mm(1.1811in)
5-28
3. Measure:
• valve spring tilt a
Out of specification -» Replace the valve spring.
Spring tilt limit
Intake valve spring
1.7 mm (0.0669 in) ( 2.5° )
Exhaust valve spring
1.8 mm (0.0709 in)( 2.5° )
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
% m
EAS00245
INSTALLING THE VALVES
The following procedure applies to all of the valves and related components.
1 . Deburr:
8valve stem end
(with an oil stone)
2. Lubricate:
8valve stem 1
8valve stem seal 2
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide oil
3. Install:
8valve 1
8valve spring seat 2
8valve stem seal 3 N e w
8valve spring 4
8valve spring retainer 5
(into the cylinder head)
NOTE:
Install the valve spring with the larger pitch a facing up. b Smaller pitch
5-29
4. Install:
8valve cotters 1
NOTE:
Install the valve cotters by compressing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor and the valve spring compressor attachment 2 .
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
% m
Valve spring compressor
90890-04019(YM-04019)
Valve spring compressor attachment
90890-04148(YM-04148)
5. To secure the valve cotters onto the valve stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a softface hammer. c C
Hitting the valve tip with excessive force could damage the valve.
6. Install: valve pad 1
NOTE:
8 Lubricate the valve pad with engine oil.
8 Valve pad must be reinstalled in its original position.
5-30
EAS00251
CYLINDER AND PISTON
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
% m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Order Job/Part
Removing the cylinder and piston
Cylinder head
Timing chain guide(exhaust side)
Cylinder
Dowel pin
Cylinder gasket
Piston pin clip
Piston pin
Piston
Piston ring set
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”CYLINDER HEAD”.
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
Refer to”REMOVING THE CYLINDER
AND PISTON” and “INSTALLING THE
PISTON AND CYLINDER”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-31
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
% m
EAS00253
REMOVING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON
1 . Remove:
8piston pin clip 1
8piston pin 2
8piston 3 c C
Do not use a hammer to drive the piston pin out.
NOTE:
8 Before removing the piston pin clip, cover the crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent the piston pin clip from falling into the crankcase.
8 Before removing the piston pin, deburr the piston pin clip’s groove and the piston’s pin bore area. If both areas are deburred and the piston pin is still difficult to remove, remove it with the piston pin puller s e t 4 .
Piston pin puller set
90890-01304(YU-01304)
2. Remove:
8top ring
82nd ring
8oil ring
NOTE:
When removing a piston ring, open the end gap with your fingers and lift the other side of the ring over the piston crown.
5-32
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
EAS00255
CHECKING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON
1. Check:
• piston wall
• cylinder wall
Vertical scratches -* Rebore or replace the cylinder, and replace the piston and piston rings as a set.
2. Measure: piston-to-cylinder clearance
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Measure cylinder bore “C” with the cylinder bore gauge.
NOTE:
Measure cylinder bore “C” by taking side-to-side and front-to-back measurements of the cylinder.
Then, find the average of the measurements.
Cylinder bore “C” 38.000 ~ 38.010mm
(1.4961 ~ 1.4965in)
0.05mm (0.0020in)
Taper limit “T”
Out-of-round “R”
0.05mm (0.0020in)
~ D
- maximum of D or D
“R” = maximum of D
1
, D
3 5
- minimum of D
2
, D
4 or D
6 b. If out of specification, rebore or replace the cylinder, and replace the piston and piston rings as a set. c. Measure piston skirt diameter “P” with the micrometer.
5-33 a 5mm(0.1969in) from the bottom edge of the piston
Standard
Piston size “P”
37.975 ~ 37.990mm
(1.4951 ~ 1.4957in) d. If out of specification, replace the piston and piston rings as a set.
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
% m e. Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clearance with the following formula.
Piston-to-cylinder clearance =
Cylinder bore “C” -
Piston skirt diameter “P”
Piston-to-cylinder clearance
0.010 ~ 0.035mm(0.0004 ~
0.0014in)
<Limit>:0.15mm(0.0059in) f. If out of specification, rebore or replace the cylinder, and replace the piston and piston rings as a set.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-34
CYLINDER AND PISTON
EAS00263
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS
1. Measure:
• piston ring side clearance
Out of specification -» Replace the piston and piston rings as a set.
NOTE:
Before measuring the piston ring side clearance, eliminate any carbon deposits from the piston ring grooves and piston rings.
5-35
Piston ring side clearance
Top ring
0.03 ~ 0.07 mm(0.0012~0.0028 in)
<Limit>: 0.12mm(0.0047 in)
2nd ring
0.02 ~ 0.06 mm(0.0008~0.0024 in)
<Limit>:0.12 mm(0.0047 in)
2. Install:
8piston ring
(into the cylinder)
NOTE:
Level the piston ring into the cylinder with the piston crown. a 10 mm (0.3937 in)
3. Measure:
• piston ring end gap
Out of specification -» Replace the piston ring.
NOTE:
The oil ring expander spacer’s end gap cannot be measured. If the oil ring rail’s gap is excessive, replace all three piston rings.
Piston ring end gap
Top ring
0.05 ~ 0.15 mm (0.0020 ~ 0.0059 in)
<Limit>: 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
2nd ring
0.05 ~ 0.17 mm (0.0020 ~ 0.0067 in)
<Limit>: 0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
Oil ring
0.20 ~ 0.70 mm (0.0079 ~ 0.0276 in)
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
% m
EAS00265
CHECKING THE PISTON PIN
1. Check:
• piston pin
Blue discoloration/grooves -* Replace the piston pin and then check the lubrication system.
2. Measure:
• piston pin outside diameter a
Out of specification -* Replace the piston pin.
Piston pin outside diameter
9.996 ~ 10.000 mm (0.3935 ~
0.3937 in)
<Limit>:9.976 mm (0.3928 in)
3. Measure:
• piston pin bore diameter b
Out of specification^ Replace the piston.
Piston pin bore diameter
10.002 ~ 10.013 mm (0.3938 ~
0.3942 in)
<Limit>:10.043 mm (0.3954 in)
4. Calculate:
• piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance
Out of specification -* Replace the piston pin and piston as a set.
Piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance =
Piston pin bore diameter b -
Piston pin outside diameter a
Piston-pin-to-piston clearance
0.002 ~ 0.017 mm (0.0001 ~ 0.0007 in)
5-36
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
% m
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN GUIDE
1. Check:
8 timing chain guide (exhaust side)
Damage/wear -» Replace
EAS00267
INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER
1 . Install:
8oil ring expander 1
8oil ring rail 2
82nd ring 3
8top ring 4
NOTE:
Be sure to install the piston rings so that the manufacturer’s marks or numbers face up.
5-37
2. Install:
8piston 1
8piston pin 2
8piston pin clip New 3
NOTE:
8
8
Apply engineoil the piston pin.
Make sure the arrow mark a on the piston points towards the exhaust side of the cylinder.
8 Before installing the piston pin clip, cover the crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent the clip from falling into the crankcase.
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
% m
3. Install:
8gasket
N e w
8dowel pins
4. Lubricate:
8piston
8piston rings
8cylinder
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
5. Offset:
8piston ring end gaps a Top ring b Lower oil ring rail c Upper oil ring rail d 2nd ring
A Exhaust side
6. Install:
8cylinder 1
8timing chain guide(exhaust side)
NOTE:
8 While compressing the piston rings with one hand, install the cylinder with the other hand.
8 Pass the timing chain and timing chain guide (exhaust side) through the timing chain cavity.
5-38
EAS00316
BELT DRIVE
V-BELT CASE COVER
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
%. 10Nm(1.0m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Job/Part
Removing the V-belt case cover
Kickstarter
Cover
V-belt case cover
V-belt case cover gasket
Dowel pin
P|« 12Nm(1.2m • kg, 8.7 ft* lb)
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
2
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-39
EAS00338
KICKSTARTER
BELT DRIVE
ENG
% m
Order Job/Part
Disassembling the kickstarter
V-belt case cover
1 Kick pinion gear
2 Kick pinion gear clip
3 Circlip/Plate washer
4 Kickstarter shaft
5 Torsion spring
6 Solid bush
Remarks
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”V-BELT CASE COVER“.
1
1
1/1 Refer to”INSTALLING THE KICKSTARTER”.
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5-40
5-41
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
EAS00340
INSTALLING THE KICKSTARTER
1. Install:
8solid b u s h 1
8kick shaft assembly 2
8torsion spring 3
2. Hook:
8torsion spring
NOTE:
Hook the spring e n d a on the kickstarter shaft b as shown, and hook the other end c on the projectiond .
3. Install:
8plain washer
8circlip 1 N e w
4. Install:
8kick pinion g e a r 1
8kick pinion gear c l i p 2
NOTE:
8 Lubricate the kick pinion gear clip and shaft with molybdenum disulfide oil.
8 Install the kick pinion gear clip at the position shown.
V-BELT AND PRIMARY/SECONDARY SHEAVE
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
40Nm (4.0 m « kg, 28.9 f H b)
30Nm (3.0 m « kg, 21.7 f H b)
8
9
10
11
12
13
4
5
6
7
Order
1
2
3
Job/Part
Removing the V-belt and primary/secondary sheave
Primary sheave nut/Plate washer
Oneway clutch
Primary fixed sheave
Secondary sheave nut
Clutch housing
Secondary sheave
V-belt
Plate washer
Collar
Primary sliding sheave
Cam/Weight
Slider
Plate washer
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1/1
1
1
1
1
1
1/6
3
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to”REMOVING THE PRIMARY
SHEAVE” and “INSTALLING THE SEC-
ONDARY SHEAVE, V-BELT AND PRI-
MARY SHEAVE” .
Refer to”REMOVING THE SECOND-
ARY SHEAVE AND V-BELT” and “IN-
STALLING THE SECONDARY
SHEAVE, V-BELT AND PRIMARY
SHEAVE” .
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-42
SECONDARY SHEAVE
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
Order Job/Part
Disassembling the secondary
Q’ty sheave
1 Clutch carrier nut
2 Clutch carrier
Remarks
Disassemble the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”DISASSEMBLING THE SEC-
1 ONDARY SHEAVE” and “ASSEMBLING
THE SECONDARY SHEAVE”.
3 Clutch shoe spring
4 Compression spring
5 Secondary spring seat
6 Guide pin
7 Secondary sliding sheave
8 O-ring
9 Oil seal
0 Secondary fixed sheave
3
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
Refer to”ASSEMBLING THE SECOND-
ARY SHEAVE” .
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5-43
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
EAS00317
REMOVING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE
1. Remove:
8primary sheave nut 1
8plate washer
8oneway clutch
8primary fixed sheave 2
NOTE:
While holding the primary fixed sheave with the rotor holding tool 3 , loosen the primary fixed sheave nut.
Rotor holding tool
90890-01235 (YU-01235)
-^— "\f ^^^^\\
Jf2/®
-^z^r^^
«S
If M.
/ / jS/Ki/
EAS00318
REMOVING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE AND
V-BELT
1 . Remove:
8secondary sheave nut 1
8clutch housing 2
NOTE:
While holding the clutch housing with the sheave holder 3 , loosen the secondary sheave nut. y-
Sheave holder
90890-01701 (YS-01880-A)
2. Loosen:
8clutch carrier nut c C
Do not remove the clutch carrier nut at this stage.
NOTE:
While holding the clutch carrier with the rotor holding tool 1 , loosen the clutch carrier nut one full turn with the socket wrench 2 .
5-44 f,
Rotor holding tool
90890-01235
YU-01235
Socket wrench(39mm)
90890-01493
%-©
1 // / /Py*—\ 1
BELT DRIVE
ENG
% m
3. Remove:
8secondary sheave 1
8V-belt 2
NOTE:
Remove the V-belt and secondary sheave from the primary sheave side.
EAS00319
DISASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY
SHEAVE
1. Remove:
8clutch carrier nut 1
NOTE:
Install the clutch spring holder 2 and clutch spring holder arm 3 onto the secondary sheave as shown. Then, compress the spring, and remove the clutch carrier nut 1 .
Clutch spring holder
90890-01337
YM-33285
YM-33285-6
5-45
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SHOES
The following procedure applies to all of the clutch shoes.
1. Check:
• clutch shoe
Damage/wear -» Replace the clutch shoes and springs as a set.
Glazed areas -» Sand with coarse sandpaper.
NOTE:
After sanding the glazed areas, clean the clutch with a cloth.
2. Measure:
• clutch shoe thickness
Out of specification -» Replace the clutch shoes and springs as a set.
j^ia
\1J
BELT DRIVE
Clutch shoe thickness
3.7mm(0.146in)
<Limit>:2.0mm(0.079in)
NOTE:
8 Inspect clutch shoesa.
8 After removing the clutch shoe spring, do not use them again.
8 Replace the all three as a set.
EAS00320
CHECKING THE V-BELT
1. Check:
• V-belt ®
Cracks/damage/wear -» Replace.
Grease/oil -» Clean the primary and secondary sheave.
2. Measure:
• V-belt width a
Out of specification -» Replace.
V-belt width
17.9 mm (0.705 in)
<Limit>: 16.1 mm (0.634 in)
CHECKING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE
1. Check:
• primary sliding sheave ©
• primary fixed sheave ®
Cracks/damage/wear -» Replace the primary sliding sheave, primary fixed sheave and V-belt.
5-46
2. Check:
• free movement
Stick or excessive play -» Replace the primary sliding sheave or collar.
NOTE:
Insert the collar ® into the primary sliding sheave ® , and check for free movement.
BELT DRIVE
ENG
EAS00321
CHECKING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE WEIGHTS
The following procedure applies to all of the primary sheave weights.
1. Check:
• primary sheave weight
Cracks/damage/wear -* Replace.
2. Measure:
• primary sheave weight outside diameter a
Out of specification -* Replace.
Primary sheave weight outside diameter
15 mm (0.591 in)
<Limit>: 14.5 mm (0.571 in)
CHECKING THE SLIDER
1. Check:
• slider ©
Damage/wear^ Replace
EAS00322
CHECKING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE
1. Check:
• secondary fixed sheave
• secondary sliding sheave
Cracks/damage/wear -* Replace the secondary fixed and sliding sheaves as a set.
5-47
2. Check:
• torque cam groove ©
Damage/wear -* Replace the secondary fixed and sliding sheaves as a set.
3. Check:
• guide pin (2)
Damage/wear -* Replace the secondary fixed and sliding sheaves as a set.
5-48
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
EAS00323
ASSEMBLING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE
1 . Clean:
8primary fixed sheave 1
8primary sliding sheave 2
8collar 3
8primary sheave weights 4
NOTE:
Use thinner to clean up grease, dirt on the primary sliding sheave cam side 5 .
2. Install:
8primary sliding sheave 1
8primary sheave weights 2
8collar 3
3. Install:
8sliders 1
8cam 2
BELT DRIVE
ENG
# 1
1&m\
EAS00324
ASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE
1. Lubricate:
8secondary fixed sheave’s inner surface
1
8secondary sliding sheave’s inner surface
2
8oil seals
8bearings
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
BEL-RAY assembly lube
®
2. Install:
8secondary sliding sheave 1
NOTE:
Install the secondary sliding sheave onto the secondary fixed sheave 2 with the oil seal guide
3 . m
Oil seal guide
90890-01384 (YM-33299)
5-49
3. Install:
8guide pin 1
4. Lubricate:
8guide pin groove 2
8o-ring New 3
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
BEL-RAY assembly lube
®
®
©
I f ' / /F^r~\\
BELT DRIVE
ENG
% m
5. Install:
8secondary sheave 1
8spring
8clutch carrier 2
NOTE:
Attach the clutch spring holder 3 and clutch spring holder arm 4 onto the secondary sheave as shown. Then, compress the spring, and tighten the clutch carrier nut 5 .
Clutch spring holder
90890-01337 (YM-33285)
( YM-33285-6)
EAS00325
INSTALLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE, V-
BELT AND PRIMARY SHEAVE
1. Install:
8V-belt 1
8secondary sheave 2 c C
Do not allow grease to contact the V-belt, secondary sheave assembly.
NOTE:
8 Install the V-belt onto the primary sheave side.
8 Install the V-belt with printed arrow mark on the V-belt facing in the direction shown in the illustration.
5-50
2. Tighten:
8 clutch carrier nut
X I 55Nm(5.5m
* kg, 39.8ft
* lb)
NOTE:
While holding the clutch carrier with the rotor holding tool © , tighten the clutch carrier nut with the socket wrench ® .
5-51
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
Rotor holding tool
90890-01235
YU-01235
Socket wrench(39mm)
90890-01493
3. Install:
• clutch housing (T)
• secondary sheave nut ®
X I 40Nm(4.0m
* kg, 28.9ft
* lb)
NOTE:
Tighten the secondary sheave nut with the sheave holder ® .
^
Sheave holder
90890-01701
YS-01880-A
4. Install:
• primary fixed sheave ©
• oneway clutch
• plate washer
• primary sheave nut ®
X I 30Nm(3.0m
* kg, 21.7ft
* lb)
NOTE:
While holding the primary fixed sheave with the rotor holding tool ® , tighten the primary fixed sheave nut.
5-52
BELT DRIVE
ENG %m
5. Position:
8V-belt 1
NOTE:
Position the V-belt in the primary sheave 2
(when the pulley is at its widest position) and in the secondary sheave 3 (when the pulley is at its narrowest position), and make sure the Vbelt is tight.
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG
% m
EAS00341
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
STATOR COIL ASSEMBLY
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Removing the stator coil assembly
Coolant
Job/Part
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Drain.
Refer to”CHANGING THE COOLANT”in chapter 3.
Single seat/Trunk
Front cover
Side cover(left and right)
Battery cover/Battery
Footrest board
Radiator
Crankshaft position sensor coupler/Stator coil assembly coupler
Fan
Nut/Plate washer
AC magneto rotor
Woodruff key
1/1
1
1/1
1
1
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
Disconnect.
5-53
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG
% m
Order
6
7
8
Job/Part
Lock plate
Crankshaft position sensor
Stator coil assembly
Remarks
Q’ty
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-54
EAS00342
STARTER CLUTCH
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG %m
Order Job/Part
Removing the starter clutch
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AC magneto rotor
Stator coil assembly
Crankcase cover(right)
Starter clutch nut
Washer
Starter wheel gear
Roller
Collar
Starter clutch
Idle gear
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Drain.
Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE
OIL”in chapter 3.
Refer to”REMOVING THE AC MAG-
NETO” and “INSTALLING THE AC MAG-
NETO”. c C
The starter clutch nut is left-hand thread.
Refer to”REMOVING THE STARTER
CLUTCH” and “INSTALLING THE
STARTER CLUTCH” .
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-55
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG
% m
EAS00347
REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO
1. Remove:
8AC magneto rotor n u t 1
8washer
NOTE:
8 While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with the sheave holder 3 , loosen the AC magneto rotor nut.
8 Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the projection on the AC magneto rotor.
Sheave holder
90890-01701
YS-01880-A
2. Remove:
8AC magneto rotor 1
(with the flywheel puller set 2 )
8woodruff key c C
To protect the end of the crankshaft, place an appropriate sized socket between the flywheel puller set’s center bolt and the crankshaft.
NOTE:
Make sure the flywheel puller is centered over the AC magneto rotor.
Flywheel puller set
90890-01468
YU-33270-B
5-56
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG
% m
EAS00344
REMOVING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Remove:
8crankcase cover (right)1
NOTE:
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
2. Remove:
8starter clutch n u t 1
8washer
8starter wheel gear
8roller
8collar
8starter clutch
8idle gear
NOTE:
The starter clutch nut is left-hand thread.
5-57
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG %m
EAS00351
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Check:
• starter clutch roller
Damage/wear -» Replace.
2. Check:
• starter clutch idle gear
• starter wheel gear
Burrs/chips/roughness/wear -» Replace the defective part(s).
3. Check:
• starter wheel gear’s contacting surfaces
Damage/pitting/wear -» Replace the starter clutch gear.
4. Check:
8starter clutch operation
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Install the starter wheel gear 1 o n t o the starter clutch 2 and hold the starter clutch. b. When turning the starter wheel gear clockwise A , the starter clutch and the starter wheel gear should engage, otherwise the starter clutch is faulty and must be replaced. c. When turning the starter wheel gear counterclockwise B , it should turn freely, otherwise the starter clutch is faulty and must be replaced.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-58
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG %m
EAS00355
INSTALLING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Install:
• idle gear
• starter clutch
• collar
• roller
• starter wheel gear
• washer
• starter clutch nut ®
\ | 90 Nm (9.0 m * kg, 65.1 ft * lb)
NOTE:
The starter clutch nut is left-hand thread.
2. Install:
• gasket New
• crankcase cover (right) ©
X I 10 Nm (1.0 m * kg, 7.2 ft * lb)
5-59
EAS00354
INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO
1. Install:
8stator coil assembly 1
8crankshaft position sensor 2
8woodruff k e y 3
8AC magneto rotor
8washer
8AC magneto rotor nut
NOTE:
8 Clean the tapered portion of the crankshaft and the AC magneto rotor hub.
8 When installing the AC magneto rotor, make sure the woodruff key is properly seated in the keyway of the crankshaft.
STARTER CLUTCH AND AC MAGNETO
ENG
% m
2. Tighten:
• AC magneto rotor nut (T)
X I 43 Nm (4.3 m * kg, 31.1 ft * lb)
NOTE:
• While holding the AC magneto rotor (2) with the sheave holder ® , tighten the AC magneto rotor nut.
• Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the projection on the AC magneto rotor. f*
Sheave holder
90890-01701
YS-01880-A
5-60
OIL PUMP
ENG %m
EAS00360
OIL PUMP
4Nm (0.4 m « kg, 2.9 f H b)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Job/Part
Removing the oil pump
Radiator
AC magneto
Starter clutch
Drive gear
Circlip/Plate washer
Oil pump driven gear
Dowel pin
Oil pump
3
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”RADIATOR”in chapter 6.
1
1/1
1
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-61
11710404
OIL PUMP
EAS00364
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP
1. Check:
• oil pump drive gear
• oil pump driven gear ©
• oil pump housing
• oil pump housing cover
Cracks/damage/wear -» Replace the defective part(s).
2. Measure:
• inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance A
• outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance \B\
• oil-pump-housing-to-inner-rotor-andouter-rotor clearance \c\
Out of specification -» Replace the oil pump.
© Inner rotor
(2) Outer rotor
(3) Oil pump housing
Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance
0.15 mm (0.006 in) or less
<Limit>: 0.23 mm (0.009 in)
Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance
0.13 ~ 0.18 mm (0.005 ~ 0.007 in)
<Limit>: 0.25mm (0.010 in)
Oil-pump-housing-to-inner-rotorand-outer-rotor clearance
0.07 ~ 0.12 mm (0.003 ~ 0.005 in)
<Limit>: 0.19 mm (0.008 in)
5-62
3. Check:
• oil pump operation
Rough movement -» Repeat steps (1) and
(2) or replace the defective part(s).
5-63
OIL PUMP
ENG %m
EAS00375
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP
1. Lubricate:
8inner rotor
8outer rotor
8oil pump shaft
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
2. Install:
8 oil pump shaft (T)
(to the oil pump housing ® )
8 pin (3)
8 inner rotor ®
8 outer rotor ©
8 oil pump housing cover ®
8 oil pump housing screw
X I 4 Nm (0.4 m * kg, 2.9 ft * lb)
NOTE:
When installing the inner rotor, align the pin (3) in the oil pump shaft with the groove a in the inner rotor (4) .
3. Check:
8 oil pump operation
Refer to “CHECKING THE OIL PUMP”.
EAS00376
INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP
1. Install:
8oil pump drive gear 1
8gasket New
8oil p u m p 2
8oil pump bolt
\ | 4 Nm (0.4 m * kg, 2.9 ft * lb)
C
After tightening the bolts, make sure the oil pump turns smoothly.
EAS00419
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
ENG
% m
Order Job/Part
Removing the transmission
Transmission oil
Muffler/Bracket
Rear wheel
V-belt case cover
Secondary sheave
1 Transmission cover
2 Transmission cover gasket
3 Dowel pin
4 Main axle
5 Drive axle
6 Primary drive gear
1
1
2
1
1
1
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Drain.
Refer to”CHANGING THE TRANSMIS-
SION OIL” in chapter 3.
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL”.
Refer to”REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE” in chapter 4.
Refer to”BELT DRIVE”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-64
5-65
TRANSMISSION
EAS00425
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION
1. Measure:
• main axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge )
Out of specification -» Replace the main axle.
Main axle runout limit
0.04 mm (0.002 in)
2. Measure:
• drive axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge )
Out of specification -» Replace the drive axle.
Primary drive gear shaft runout limit
0.04 mm (0.002 in)
3 . Check:
• transmission gears
Blue discoloration/pitting/wear -» Replace the defective gear(s).
• transmission gear dogs
Cracks/damage/rounded edges -» Replace the defective gear(s).
4 . Check:
• transmission gear engagement
(each pinion gear to its respective wheel gear)
Incorrect -» Reassemble the transmission axle assemblies.
5 . Check:
• transmission gear movement
Rough movement -» Replace the defective part(s).
6 . Check:
• circlip
Bends/damage/looseness -» Replace.
EAS00381
CRANKSHAFT
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
CRANKSHAFT
ENG %m
1 * 7Nm (0.7 m » kg, 5.1 f H b)
5
7Nm (0.7 m » kg, 5.1 f H b)
Order
1
2
3
4
Job/Part
Removing the crankshaft assembly
Engine
Cylinder head
Cylinder and piston
V-belt case cover
V-belt and primary/secondary sheave
Radiator
Water pump
Starter clutch
AC magneto
Oil pump
Transmission
Rear wheel
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”ENGINE REMOVAL” .
Refer to”CYLINDER HEAD”.
Refer to”CYLINDER AND PISTON”.
Refer to”OIL PUMP”.
Refer to”TRANSMISSION”.
Refer to”REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE”in chapter 4.
Tension spring
Circlip/Plate washer
Pin
Centerstand
1
1/1
1
1
5-66
CRANKSHAFT
ENG %m f V 7Nm (0.7 m » kg, 5.1 f H b)
5
7Nm (0.7 m » kg, 5.1 f H b)
Order
5 Hook
6 Drain plug
Job/Part
7 Oil strainer
8 Compression spring
9 O-ring
10 Crankcase(right)
11
12
13
14
Spacer
Dowel pin
Guide
Crankshaft
15 Timing chain
16 Crankcase(left)
17 Oil seal
18 Bolt/O-ring
19 Timing chain guide (intake side)
5-67
Remarks
Q’ty
1
1
1
1
1
1 Refer to”DISASSEMBLING THE
CRANKCASE” and “ASSEMBLING THE
CRANKCASE”.
1
1
1
1/1
1
1
2
1
1 Refer to”REMOVING THE CRANK-
SHAFT ASSEMBLY” and “INSTALLING
THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-68
CRANKSHAFT
ENG %m
EAS00385
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
1. Remove:
8centerstand assembly
2. Remove:
8crankcase b o l t s 1
NOTE:
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
3. Remove:
8right crankcase 1
8spacer c C
Tap on one side of the crankcase with a softface hammer. Tap only on reinforced portions of the crankcase, not on the crankcase mating surfaces. Work slowly and carefully and make sure the crankcase halves separate evenly.
CRANKSHAFT
ENG
% m
EAS00389
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
1. Remove:
8crankshaft assembly 1
8timing c h a i n 2
8timing chain guide(intake side)
NOTE:
8 Before removing the crankshaft assembly, remove the timing chain from the crankshaft sprocket.
8 The crankshaft assembly cannot be removed if the timing chain is attached onto the crankshaft sprocket.
EAS00394
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND CON-
NECTING ROD
1. Measure:
• crankshaft runout
Out of specification -» Replace the crankshaft, bearing or both.
NOTE:
Turn the crankshaft slowly.
Maximum crankshaft runout
0.03mm(0.0012in)
5-69
2. Measure:
• big end side clearance
Out of specification -» Replace the big end bearing, crankshaft pin, or connecting rod.
Big end side clearance
0.15~0.45mm(0.006~0.018in)
^ ^ ^ //\ y>^ y& y% y/y
(if my
CRANKSHAFT
ENG
% m
3. Measure:
• crankshaft width
Out of specification -» Replace the crankshaft.
Crankshaft width
42.45~42.50mm(1.671~1.673in)
4. Check:
• crankshaft sprocket (T)
Damage/wear -» Replace the crankshaft.
• bearing (2)
Cracks/damage/wear -» Replace the crankshaft.
• oil pump drive gear
Damage/wear -» Replace the crankshaft.
5. Check:
• crankshaft journal
Scratches/wear -» Replace the crankshaft.
• crankshaft journal oil passage
Obstruction -» Blow out with compressed air.
EAS00399
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE
1. Thoroughly wash the crankcase halves in a mild solvent.
2. Thoroughly clean all the gasket surfaces and crankcase mating surfaces.
3. Check:
• crankcase
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
• oil delivery passages
Obstruction -» Blow out with compressed air.
5-70
CRANKSHAFT
ENG
EAS00207
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN AND TIMING
CHAIN GUIDE(INTAKE SIDE)
1. Check:
• timing chain
Damage/stiffness -> Replace the timing chain and camshaft sprocket as a set.
2. Check:
• timing chain guide (intake side)
Damage/wear -> Replace.
EAS00401
CHECKING THE BEARINGS AND OIL
SEALS
1. Check:
• bearings
Clean and lubricate the bearings, then rotate the inner race with your finger.
Rough movement -> Replace.
2. Check:
• oil seals
Damage/wear -» Replace.
5-71
EAS00402
CHECKING THE CIRCLIPS AND WASHERS
1. Check:
• circlips
Bends/damage/looseness -> Replace.
• washers
Bends/damage -> Replace.
5-72
CRANKSHAFT
EAS00408
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT
1. Install:
8timing chain guide (intake side)
8timing c h a i n 1
8crankshaft assembly 2
NOTE:
Install the timing chain so it is not visible through the opening in the left crankcase 3 . c C
To avoid scratching the crankshaft and to ease the installation procedure, lubricate the oil seal lips with lithium-soap-based grease and each bearing with engine oil.
NOTE:
Put the timing chain in parallel into the crankcase, then use hands to place the crankshaft assembly into the crankcase. Manually rotate the crankshaft to check whether it is tightly engaged with the timing chain. (if not, install again)
EAS00418
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
1. Thoroughly clean all the gasket mating surfaces and crankcase mating surfaces.
2. Apply:
8sealant
(onto the crankcase mating surfaces)
Yamaha bond No. 1215
90890-85505
Sealant (Quick Gasket
®
)
ACC-11001-05-01
NOTE:
Do not allow any sealant to come into contact with the oil gallery.
5-73
CRANKSHAFT
ENG %m
3. Install:
8dowel pins
8spacer
8right crankcase 1
NOTE:
Tap lightly on the right crankcase with a softface hammer.
4. Tighten:
• crankcase bolts
X I 10Nm(1.0m
* kg, 7.2ft
* lb)
NOTE:
Tighten the crankcase bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern.
5. Apply:
• engine oil
(onto the crankshaft pin, bearing and oil delivery hole)
6. Check:
• crankshaft operation
Rough movement -* Repair.
COOL J C
CHAPTER 6
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR 6-1
CHECKING THE RADIATOR 6-2
INSTALLING THE RADIATOR 6-3
THERMOSTAT 6-4
CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT 6-5
INSTALLING THE THERMOSTAT 6-6
WATER PUMP 6-7
DISASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP 6-9
CHECKING THE WATER PUMP 6-9
ASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP 6-10
INSTALLING THE WATER PUMP 6-11
EAS00454
RADIATOR
RADIATOR
COOL J C
COOLING SYSTEM
Order Job/Part
Removing the radiator
Front cover
Side cover(left and right)
Single seat/Trunk
Footrest board
Coolant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Radiator cover
Radiator cap
Conduit hose
Radiator inlet hose
Radiator outlet hose
Radiator
Fan case
6-1
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
Drain.
Refer to”CHANGING THE COOLANT”in chapter 3.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
RADIATOR
EAS00455
CHECKING THE RADIATOR
1. Check:
• radiator fins
Obstruction -» Clean.
Apply compressed air to the rear of the radiator.
Damage -» Repair or replace.
NOTE:
Straighten any flattened fins with a thin, flat-head screwdriver.
2. Check:
• radiator inlet hose
• radiator outlet hose
• conduit hose
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
6-2
3. Measure:
• radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure -» Replace the radiator cap.
Radiator cap opening pressure
107.9 ~ 137.3kPa
(1.1 ~ 1.4kg/cm
2
, 15.6 ~ 19.9psi)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Install the radiator cap tester 1 and radiator cap tester adapter 2 to the radiator cap
3 .
Radiator cap tester
90890-01325
YU-24460-01
Radiator cap tester adapter
90890-01352
YU-33984 b. Apply the specified pressure for ten seconds and make sure there is no drop in pressure.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4. Check:
• radiator fan
Damage -» Replace.
Malfunction -» Check and repair.
RADIATOR
EAS00456
INSTALLING THE RADIATOR
1. Fill:
8cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recommended coolant)
Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” in chapter 3.
2. Check:
• cooling system
Leaks -» Repair or replace any faulty part.
3 © ^ ^ C
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Attach the radiator cap tester 1 to the radiator. y-
Radiator cap tester
90890-01325, YU-24460-01
Radiator cap tester adapter
90890-01352, YU-33984 b. Apply 100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm
2
, 14.22 psi) of pressure. c. Measure the indicated pressure with the gauge.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • A
3. Measure:
• radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure -» Replace the radiator cap.
Refer to “CHECKING THE RADIATOR”.
6-3
EAS00460
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
COOL J C
10Nm (1.0 m « kg, 7.2 f H b)
10Nm (1.0 m « kg, 7.2 f H b)
4
Order Job/Part
Removing the thermostat
Front cover
Side cover(left and right)
Single seat/Trunk
Footrest board
Coolant
1
2
3
4
5
6
Clip
Thermostat inlet hose
Clip
Thermostat outlet hose
Thermostat cover
Thermostat
6-4
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
Drain.
Refer to”CHANGING THE COOLANT”in chapter 3.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
THERMOSTAT
EAS00462
CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT
1. Check:
• thermostat (T)
Does not open at 85 ~100°C (185 ~212°F)
-» Replace.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Suspend the thermostat in a container filled with water. b. Slowly heat the water. c. Place a thermometer in the water. d. While stirring the water, observe the thermostat and thermometer’s indicated temperature.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • m
^ m^^^^r
85±2 C
(185±3.6 F)
100 C
(212 F)
' i
3.5mm
(0.14 in)
\
I
© Thermostat
(2) Container
(3) Thermometer
(4) Water
A Fully closed
B Fully open
NOTE:
If the accuracy of the thermostat is in doubt, replace it. A faulty thermostat could cause serious overheating or overcooling.
2. Check:
• thermostat cover
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
3. Check:
• thermostat inlet hose
• thermostat outlet hose
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
6-5
6-6
THERMOSTAT
COOL J C
EAS00466
INSTALLING THE THERMOSTAT
1. Install:
• thermostat ©
• thermostat cover
X | 10Nm(1.0m
* kg, 7.2ft
* lb)
NOTE:
Align the breather a of thermostat to mark b of thermosat before installation.
2. Fill:
• cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recommended coolant)
Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” in chapter 3.
3. Check:
• cooling system
Leaks -» Repair or replace any faulty part.
4. Measure:
• radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure -» Replace the radiator cap.
Refer to “CHECKING THE RADIATOR”.
EAS00468
WATER PUMP
WATER PUMP
COOL J C lyJ2| 10 4i , /
10Nm(1.0m« kg, 7.2 ft* lb) d r ^ ®
Order Job/Part
Removing the water pump
Front cover
Side cover(left and right)
Single seat/Trunk
Footrest board
Coolant
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
Breather hose
Thermostat inlet hose
Water pump outlet hose
Radiator outlet hose
Water pump housing cover
Gasket
Water pump housing
Plate
Impeller shaft
6-7
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Drain.
Refer to”CHANGING THE COOLANT”in chapter 3.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
WATER PUMP
COOL J C
6
Order
10
11
12
Oil seal
Bearing
Gasket
Job/Part
® ^ ^ ®
10Nm(1.0m • kg, 7.2 ft* lb)
Remarks
Q’ty
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
6-8
WATER PUMP
COOL J C
EAS00471
DISASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP
1. Remove:
8water pump housing c o v e r 1
8dowel pin
8gasket
2. Remove:
8plate 2
8impeller shaft 3
8gasket
8oil seal
(with a thin, flat-head screwdriver)
8bearing
NOTE:
8 Remove the oil seal from the inside of the water pump housing.
8 Remove the bearing from the inside of the water pump housing.
EAS00474
CHECKING THE WATER PUMP
1. Check:
• water pump housing cover
• water pump housing
• impeller ©
Cracks/damage/wear -» Replace.
6-9
2. Check:
• water pump seal (T)
Cracks/damage/wear -» Replace.
3. Check:
• bearing
Rough movement -» Replace.
4. Check:
• radiator outlet hose
Cracks/damage/wear -» Replace.
1
6-10
WATER PUMP
COOL J C
EAS00475
ASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP
1. Install:
8bearing1
NOTE:
8 Before installing the oil seal, apply tap water or coolant onto its out surface.
8 Install the oil seal with a socket that matches its outside diameter.
2. Install:
8water pump seal New 1
(into the water pump housing 2 ) c C
Never lubricate the water pump seal surface with oil or grease.
NOTE:
8 Install the water pump seal with the special tools.
8 Press in depth of water pump and oil seal is 5.5~6.0mm a .
^
Mechanical seal installer
90890-04145 3
Middle driven shaft bearing driver
90890-04058 4
YM-04058
3. Measure:
8 impeller shaft tilt
Out of specification -» Replace the impeller shaft .
Impeller shaft tilt limit
0.15mm(0.0059in)
1 Straightedge
2 Impeller
4. Install:
8impeller s h a f t 1
8 p l a t e 2 c C
After installation, check that the impeller shaft rotates smoothly.
WATER PUMP
COOL J C
5. Install:
8gasket New
8water pump housing c o v e r 1
• water pump assembly (T)
M§
Iae EAS00478
INSTALLING THE WATER PUMP
1. Install:
X | 10Nm(1.0m
* kg, 7.2ft
* lb)
NOTE: b//
Align the slit a on the impeller shaft with
^ bolt.
2. Install:
• breather hose
• thermostat inlet hose
• water pump outlet hose
• radiator outlet hose
3. Fill:
• cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recommended coolant)
Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” in chapter 3.
4. Check:
• cooling system
Leaks -» Repair or replace the faulty part.
5. Measure:
• radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure -» Replace the radiator cap.
Refer to “CHECKING THE RADIATOR”.
6-11
FI ifl
CHAPTER 7
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM 7-1
WIRING DIAGRAM 7-2
ECU’S SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION 7-4
CHECKING FOR A DEFECTIVE ENGINE TROUBLE WARNING
LIGHT BULB 7-5
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FANCTION TABLE 7-5
Self-diagnostic fanction table 7-5
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 7-7
DIAGNOSTIC MODE 7-8
TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS 7-12
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR 7-26
THROTTLE BODY 7-26
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL HOSE 7-27
FUEL TANK 7-28
REMOVING THE FUEL HOSE 7-29
REMOVING THE FUEL PUMP 7-29
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY 7-30
INSTALLING THE FUEL PUMP 7-31
INSTALLING THE FUEL HOSE 7-31
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP AND PRESSURE REGULATOR OP-
ERATION 7-32
CHECKING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 7-32
CHECKING THE ISC (IDLE SPEED CONTROL) VALVE 7-34
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM 7-35
AIR INJECTION 7-35
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE 7-35
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 7-36
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE AND AIR FILTER CASE 7-37
CHECKING THE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM 7-38
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
EAS00894
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
1 ECU
2 Engine trouble warning light
3 Lean angle cut-off switch
4 Fuel hose
5 Ignition coil
6 Fuel injector
7 Intake air pressure sensor
8 ISC(idle speed control) valve
9 Intake air temperature sensor
0 Battery q Air filter case w Catalytic converter e Crankshaft position sensor r Coolant temperature sensor t Spark plug y Fuel tank u Fuel pump i Throttle position sensor
FI ifl
7-1
WIRING DIAGRAM
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Y L
< P/W
Br/W x
B/L
Br/W B/L
< P/W x
Y
-Hi,®
5:
G/Y
~
L / G
Br mi
L H k J — © — t H i B — 1
BSD
" O
W
W
7-2
1 AC magneto
3 Main fuse
4 Battery
8 Engine stop switch
9 ECU
0 Main switch q Intake air pressure sensor w Intake air temperature sensor e Throttle position sensor r Lean angle cut-off switch t Coolant temperature sensor y Ignition coil u Spark plug i Fuel injector o Fuel pump p ISC (idle speed control) valve s Dimmer switch f Headlight c High beam indicator light b Engine trouble warning light n Coolant temperature indicator light m Speed sensor
.
FI diagnostic tool (optional)
/ Sidestand switch (optional)
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
7-3
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
ECU’S SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
The ECU is equipped with a self-diagnostic function in order to ensure that the engine control system is operating normally. If this function detects a malfunction in the system, it immediately operates the engine under substitute characteristics and illuminates the engine trouble warning light to alert the rider that a malfunction has occurred in the system. Once a malfunction has been detected, a fault code is stored in the memory of the ECU.
1 Engine trouble warning light
8 To inform the rider that the fuel injection system is not functioning correctly, the engine trouble warning light flashes when the start switch is being pushed to start the engine.
8 If a malfunction is detected in the system by the self-diagnostic function, this mode provides an appropriate substitute characteristic operation, and alerts the rider of the detected malfunction by illuminating the engine trouble warning light.
8 After the engine has been stopped, the lowest fault code number appears on the engine trouble warning light (or displayed on the Fl diagnostic tool). It remains stored in the memory of the ECU until it is deleted.
Engine trouble warning light fault code indication
Digit of 10: Cycles of 1 see. ON and 1.5 sec. OFF.
Digit of 1 : Cycles of 0.5 sec, ON and 0.5 sec. OFF.
<Example> 42
Light ON
Light OFF
1 1.5 1 1.5 1 1.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 3
EAS00900
Engine trouble warning light indication and Fl system operating condition
Engine condition
Stop
Warning light indication
Flashing
Remains ON
Flashing
(indicate the fault code)
Fl operation Vehicle operation
Operation stopped
Operated with substitute characteristics in accordance with the description of the malfunction
Unable
Able
_ _
7-4
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
EAS00901
CHECKING FOR A DEFECTIVE ENGINE TROUBLE WARNING LIGHT BULB
The engine trouble warning light comes on for 2 seconds after the main switch has been turned “ON” and when the start switch is being pushed. If the warning light does not come on under these conditions, the warning light bulb may be defective.
Engine trouble warning light
Main switch Main switch
OFF ON
Light
OFF
Light ON for
2 seconds
Intialize
Light
OFF
EAS00902
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FANCTION TABLE
If the ECU detects an abnormal signal from a sensorwhile the vehicle is being driven, the ECU illuminates the engine trouble warning light and provides the engine with alternate operating instructions that are appropriate for the type of malfunction.
When an abnormal signal is received from a sensor, the ECU processes the specified values that are programmed for each sensor in order to provide the engine with alternate operating instructions that enable the engine to continue to operate or stop operating, depending on the conditions.
Self-diagnostic fanction table
Fault code No.
Item Symptom
12 Crankshaft position sensor No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor.
13
14
Intake air pressure sensor
(open or short circuit) (pipe system)
Intake air pressure sensor-open or short circuit detected.
Faulty intake air pressure sensor pipe system.
15
16
Throttle position sensor
(open or short circuit)(stuck)
Throttle position sensor-open or short circuit detected.
A stuck throttle position sensor is detected.
19 Broken or disconnected blue/ yellow lead of the ECU
Open circuit in the input line (blue/yellow lead) of the ECU is detected.
21 Coolant temperature sensor Coolant temperature sensor-open or short circuit is detected.
22 Intake temperature sensor Intake temperature sensor-open or short circuit is detected.
33 Faulty ignition Open circuit detected in the primary lead of the ignition coil.
37 ISC (idle speed control) valve
(stuck fully open)
Engine speed is high when the engine is idling.
Engine startability
Vehicle driveability
Unable
Able
Able
Unable
Able
Able
Unable
Able
Unable
Able
Able
Unable
Able
Able
Unable
Able
7-5
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
Fault code No.
Item Symptom
39
30
41
Fuel injector
Lean angle cut-off switch
(latch up detected) (open or short circuit)
The vehicle has overturned.
Lean angle cut-off switch-open or short circuit is detected.
42 Speed sensor
Fuel injector open or short circuit is detected.
No normal signals are received from the speed sensor.
43 Fuel system voltage (monitoring voltage)
44
Error in reading from or writing on E2PROM
46 Vehicle system power supply (monitoring voltage)
Power supply to the fuel injector, fuel pump and ignition coil are not normal.
An error is delected while reading from or writing on E2PROM (CO adjustment value).
Power supply to Fl system is not normal.
(red lead)
50
61
ECU internal malfunction
(memory check error)
ISC (idle speed control) valve unit (open or short circuit)
Faulty ECU memory. When this malfunction is detected, the code number might not appear on the engine trouble warning light or displayed on Fl diagnostic tool.
ISC (idle speed control) valve unit-open or short circuit detected.
_
Start unable warning
Engine trouble warning light flashes when the start switch is turned ON.
Relay is not activated even if the crank signal is input while the start switch is pushed.
Engine startability
Vehicle driveability
Unable
Unable
Able
Able
Able
Able
Unable
Able
Unable
Unable
Unable
Able
Able
Able
Able
Unable
Able
Unable
7-6
FI ifl
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
EAS00904
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
Engine operation is not normal or the engine trouble warning light is on.
*Engine trouble warning light may not come on even if the engine operation is not normal.
I
The engine trouble warning light comes on.
I
The engine trouble warning light does not come on.
T
Check the fault code number displayed on the Fl diagnostic tool.
I
Identify the system with the malfunction. Refer to
“FAIL-SAFE ACTIONS TABLE”.
T
Identify the probable cause of malfunction. Refer to “Fault code table”.
T
Check and repair the probable cause of malfunction.
Faultcode No.YES Faultcode No. NO
Check and repair.
Refer to “TROUBLE
SHOOTING DE-
TAILS”.
Monitor the operation of the sensors and actuators in the diagnostic mode. Refer to
“Diagnostic mode table”.
Check and repair.
Refer to “FAIL-SAFE
ACTIONS TABLE”.
I
Check the operation of following sensors and actuators in the diagnostic mode. Refer to “Diagnostic mode table”.
33: Ignition coil
39: Fuel injector
Parform ECU reinstatement action. Refer to “Reinstatement method” in ‘TROUBLESHOOTING DE-
TAILS”.
Fault code number displayed
Turn the main switch to “OFF”, turn the main switch back to “ON”, and then check if the fault code number is still displayed.
X Fault code number not displayed
Repairs completed
Erasing the malfunction history:*
The malfunction history is stored even if the main switch is turned OFF.
The malfunction history must be erased in the diagnostic mode. Referto “Diagnostic mode table (Diagnostic code No.62)”.
* Operated when the engine trouble warning light is on.
7-7
O POWER OWARNING
Fl Diagnostic Tool ©YAMAHA
2100 rpm 60 ° o o
(
D
OPOWER OWARNING
Fl Diagnostic Tool « YAM AHA'
Orpm 60 °C
S/D: 12
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
EAS00905
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
It is possible to monitor the sensor output data or check the activation of actuators with connecting the Fl diagnostic tool to the normal mode or the diagnostic monitoring mode.
<P Fl diagnostic tool
90890-03182
YU-03182
Setting the normal mode
NOTE:
The engine speed, engine temperature, and fault code, if detected, can be displayed on the LCD of the Fl diagnostic tool when the tool is connected to the vhicle and is set to the normal mode.
1. Turn the main switch to “OFF” and the engine stop switch to “RUN”.
2. Disconnect the self diag signal connector
1 , and then connect the Fl diagnostic tool
2 as shown.
3. Turn the main switch to “ON” and start the engine.
NOTE:
8 Engine temperature and engine revolution appears on the LCD of the Fl diagnostic tool.
8 ”POWER” LED (Green) comes on.
8 If a malfunction is detected in the system,
“WARNING” LED (Orange) comes on. How ever the fault code is not appears on the
LCD of Fl diagnostic tool.
4. Stop the engine.
NOTE:
If a malfunction is detected in the system, the fault code appears on the LCD of the Fl diagnostic tool. And also, “WARNING” LED(Orange) comes on.
5. Turn the main switch to “OFF” to cancel the normal mode.
6. Disconnect the Fl diagnostic tool and connect the self diag signal connector.
7-8
OPOWER OWARNING
Fl Diagnostic Tool ©YAMAHA
D03: 101
JP MODE DOWN o o o
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Setting the diagnostic mode
1. Turn the main switch to “OFF” and the engine stop switch to “RUN”..
2. Disconnect the self diag signal connector
1 , and then connect the Fl diagnostic-tool
2 as shown.
3. While press the “MODE” button, turn the main switch to “ON”.
NOTE:
8 ”DIAG” appears on the LCD of the Fl diagnostic tool.
8 ”POWER” LED (Green) comes on.
4. Press the “UP” button to select the CO adjustment mode “CO” or the diagnostic mode
“DIAG”.
5. After selecting “DIAG”, press the “MODE” button.
6. Select the diagnostic code number that applies to the item that was verified with the fault code number by pressing the “UP” and
“DOWN” buttons.
NOTE:
8 The diagnostic code number appears on the
LCD (D01-D70).
8 To decrease the selected diagnostic code number, press the “DOWN” button. Press the “DOWN” button for 1 second or longer to automatically decrease the diagnostic code numbers.
8 To increase the selected diagnostic code number, press the “UP” button. Press the
“UP” button for 1 second or longer to automatically increase the diagnostic code numbers.
7. Verify the operation of the sensor or actuator.
8Sensor operation
The data representing the operating conditions of the sensor appears on the LCD.
8Actuator operation
Press the “MODE” button to.operate the actuator.
8. Turn the main switch to “OFF” to cancel the diagnostic mode.
9. Disconnect the Fl diagnostic tool and connect the self diag signal connector.
7-9
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
Fault code table
Fault codeNo.
12
13
14
15
16
19
21
22
30
33
37
39
41
42
43
44
46
50
61
Symptom Probable cause of malfunction
No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor.
Intake air pressure sensor-open or short circuit detected.
Faulty intake air pressure sensor pipe system
Throttle position sensor-open or short circuit detected.
A stuck throttle position sensor is detected.
Open circuit in the input line (blue/ yellow lead) of ECU is detected when the start switch is pressed.
Coolant temperature sensor-open or short circuit detected.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective crankshaft position sensor.
• Malfunction in pickup rotor.
• Improperly installed sensor lead connector in the coupler.
• Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
• Open orshort circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective intake air pressure sensor.
• Improperly installed sendor lead connector in the coupler.
• Intake air pressure sensor is disconnected or clogged.
• Open or short circuit in wiring sub lead.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective throttle position sensor.
• Improperly installed throttle’position sensor lead connector in the coupler.
• Stuck throttle position sensor.
• Defective throttle position sensor.
• Open circuit in wiring harness (ECU coupler).
Intake air temperature sensor-open or short circuit detected.
The vehicle has overturned.
Open circuit is detected in the primary lead of the ignition coil.
The ISC (idle speed control) valve is stuck fully open.
Fuel injector open or short circuit is detected.
Lean angle cut-off switch-open or short circuit detected.
No normal signals are received from the speed sensor.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective coolant temperature sensor.
• Improperly installead sensor lead connector in the coupler.
• Open or short circuit in wire sub lead.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective intake temperature sensor.
• Improperly installed sensor lead connector in the coupler.
• Overturned condition.
• Open circuit in wiring harness.
• Malfunction in ignition coil.
• Improperly installed primary lead connector in the coupler.
• Malfunction in throttle body.
• Malfunction in throttle cables.
• ISC (idle speed control) valve is stuck fully open.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective fuel injector.
• Improperly installed lead connector in the coupler.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective lean angle cut-off switch.
• Improperly installed lead connector in the coupler.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
• Defective speed sensor.
• Improperly installead lead connector in the coupler.
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness. Power supply to the fuel injector, fuel pump and ignition coil are not normal.
An error is detected while reading or writing on E2PROM.
• Malfunction in ECU. (The CO adjustment value, code reregistering key code, and throttle valve fully closed notification value are not properly written on or read from the internal memory.)
• Malfunction in charging system. Power supply to Fl system is not normal.(red lead)
Faulty ECU memory. When this malfunction is detected, the code number might not appear on the meter.
ISC (idle speed control) valve open or short circuit is detected. •
•
• Malfunction in ECU. (The program and data are not properly written on or read from the internal memory.)
Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
Improperly installed lead connector in the coupler.
FI
Diagnostic code
_
D03
D03
D01
D01
D20
D06
D06
D08
D30
D54
D36
D08
D07
D09
D60
_
_
D54
7-10
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
EAS00907
Diagnostic mode table
NOTE:
8 Check the intake air temperature and coolant temprature as close as possible to the intake air temperature sensor and the coolant temperature sensor respectively.
8 If it is not possible to check the intake air temperature, use the ambient temperature as reference.
Diagnostic code
D01
D03
D05
D06
D07
D08
D09
D20
D30
D36
D52
D54
D60
D61
D62
D70
Item Description of action
Data displayed on FI diagnostic tool
(reference value)
Throttle angle
Intake air pressure
Displays the throttle angle.
• Check with throttle fully closed.
• Check with throttle fully open.
Displays the intake air pressure.
• Check the pressure in the intake manifold.
Intake air temperature Displays the intake air temperature.
• Check the temperature in the intake manifold.
Coolant temperature
Vehicle speed pulse
Displays the coolant temperature.
• Check the temperature of the coolant.
Displays the accumulation of the vehicle pulses that are generated when the tire is spun.
Lean angle cut-off switch
Fuel system voltage
(battery voltage)
Sidestand switch (Option)
Ignition coil
Displays the lean angle cut-off switch values.
Displays the fuel system voltage (battery voltage).
Displays that the switch is ON or OFF.
Fuel injector
Headlight
ISC (idle speed control) valve
E2PROM fault code display.
When the “MODE” button is pressed, the ignition coil is actuated five times per second and the
“WARNING” LED (orange) comes on.
• Connect an ignition checker.
When the “MODE”-button is pressed, the fuel injector is actuated five times per second and the
“WARNING” LED (orange) comes on.
When the “MODE” button is pressed, the headlight is actuated five times every 5 seconds and the engine trouble warning light comes on. (ON 2 seconds, OFF 3 seconds)
When the the “MODE” button is pressed, the ISC
(idle speed control) valve fully closes, and then it opens until it is at the standby opening position when the engine is started. This operation takes approximately 3 seconds until it is completed.
• Transmits the abnormal portion of the data in the E2PROM that has been detected as a fault code 44.
• If multiple malfunctions have been detected, different codes are displayed at 2-second intervals, and this process is repeated.
Malfunction history code display
• Displays the codes of the history of the selfdiagnosis malfunctions (i.e., a code of a malfunction that occurred once and which has been corrected).
• If multiple malfunctions have been detected, different codes are displayed at 2-second intervals, and this process is repeated.
Malfunction history code erasure
• Displays the total number of codes that are being detected through self diagnosis and the fault codes in the past history.
Control number
• Erases only the history codes when the
“MODE” button is pressed.
Displays the program control number.
0-125 degrees
• Fully closed position (14-20)
• Fully open position (97-107)
Compare it to the value displayed on the
Fl diagnostic tool.
Compare it to the value displayed on the
Fl diagnostic tool.
Compare it to the value displayed on the
FI diagnostic tool.
(0-999; resets to 0 after 999)
OK if the numbers appear on the FI diagnostic tool.
Upright: 0.4-1.4 V
Overturned: 3.7-4.4V
0-18.7 V
Normally, approximately 12.0 V
Stand retracted: ON
Stand extended: OFF
Check that spark is generated, 5 times with the “MODE” button press.
Check the operating sound of the fuel injector five times with “MODE” button press.
Check the headlight operating 5 times with the “MODE” button is pressed.
The ISC (idle speed control) valve unit vibrates when the ISC (idle speed control) valve operates.
01 CO adjustment value is detected.
(00) Displays when there is no malfunction.
12-61
(00) Displays when there is no malfunction.
00-18
(00) Dispiays when there is no malfunction.
00-254
7-11
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
Communication error with the FI diagnostic tool
LCD Display Sympton Probable cause of malfunction
Waiting for connection...
ERROR 4
No signals are received from the
ECU.
Commands from the Fl diagnostic tool are not accepted by the ECU.
• Improper installed lead connector in the coupler.
• The main switch is OFF position.
• Malfunction in Fl diagnostic tool.
• Malfunction in ECU.
• Turn the main switch to “OFF” once, and then turn it back to CO adjustment mode or diagnostic mode.
• Vehicle battery is insufficiently charged.
• Malfunction in Fl diagnostic tool.
• Malfunction in ECU.
EAS00908
TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS
This section describes the countermeasures per fault code number displayed on the Fl diagnostic tool. Check and service the items or components that are the probable cause of the malfunction following the order given.
After the check and service of the malfunctioned part has been completed, reset the Fl diagnostic tool display according to the “Reinstatement method”.
Fault code No.:
Fault code number displayed on the Fl diagnostic tool when the engine failed to work normally.
Refer to “Fault code table”.
Diagnostic code No.:
Diagnostic code number to be used when the diagnostic mode is operated. Refer to “DIAG-
NOSTIC MODE”.
7-12
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 12 Symptom No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor.
Used diagnostic code No. --
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Installed condition of sensor. Check the installed area for looseness or pinching.
Connected condition of connector.
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check that the coupler is connected securely.
NOTE:
Set the main switch to OFF before connecting or disconnecting the connector.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Crankshaft position sensor coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Reinstatement method
Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
4 Defective crankshaft position sensor.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit between the main wiring harnesses.
Between sensor coupler and ECU coupler. white/red black/blue
Replace if defective.
Refer to “IGNITION SYSTEM” in chapter 8.
7-13
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 13 Symptom Intake air pressure sensor-open or short circuit detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D03 (intake air pressure sensor)
Order
1
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Reinstatement method
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
NOTE:
Set the main switch to OFF before connecting or disconnecting the connector.
If there is a malfunction, reper it and connect it securely.
Intake air pressure sensor coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Sub-wire harness coupler
Reinstated by turning the main switch
ON.
2
3
Open or short circuit in wiring harnes and /or sub lead.
Defective intake air pressure sensor.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between sensor coupler and ECU coupler black/blue - black/blue pink/white - pink/whte blue- blue
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D03)
Replace the throttle body.
NOTE:
Do not remove the sensor assembly (MAQS).
1. Connect the digital circuit tester to the intake air pressure sensor coupler as shown.
Positive tester probe -» pink/white 0
Negative tester prove -» black/blue (2)
^T^S,
Br/W P/W B/L Y L
YZZZ^
^
© ©
n n
^ n • • • •
2. Set the main switch to “ON”.
3. Measure the intake air pressure sensor output voltage. n. Intake air pressure sensor output voltage
3.9~4.1V
4. Is the intake air pressure sensor OK?
7-14
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Intake air pressure sensor-hose system malfunction
Fault code No. 14 Symptom
(clogged or detached hose). tached hose).
Used diagnostic code No. D03 (intake air pressure sensor)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Reinstatement method
Connected state of connector
Intake air pressure sensor coupler
Main wirring harness ECU coupler
Sub-wire harness coupler
2 Defective intake air pressure sensor.
Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check that the coupler is connected securely.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D03)
Replace the throttle body.
NOTE:
Do not remove the sensor assembly (MAQS).
Refer to “Fault code No. 13”.
Fault code No. 15 Symptom Throttle position sensor-open or short circuit detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D01 (throttle position sensor)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
4
Installed condition of throttle position sensor.
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness and/or sub lead.
Check the installed area for looseness or pinching.
Check that it is installed in the specified position.
Refer to “THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL IN-
JECTOR”.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Throttle position sensor coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Sub-wire harness coupler
Defective throttle position sensor.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between sensor coupler and ECU coupler black/blue - black/blue yellow - yellow blue -blue
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D01)
Replace the throttle body.
NOTE:
Do not remove the sensor assembly (MAQS).
Reinstatement method
Refer to “THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL IN-
JECTOR ”.
7-15
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 16 Symptom Stuck throttle position sensor detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D01 (throttle position sensor)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Installed condition of throttle position sensor.
Defective throttle position sensor
Check the installed area for looseness or pinching.
Check that it is installed in the specified position.
Refer to “THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL IN-
JECTOR ”.
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 01)
Replace the throttle body.
NOTE:
Do not remove the sensor assembly (MAQS).
Reinstatement method
3 When fault code No.15 has been detected
Refer to “THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL IN-
JECTOR ”.
Refer to “Fault code No.15”. Refer to “Fault code
No. 15”.
Fault code No. 19 Symptom Open circuit in the input line of ECU (blue/yellow lead) detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D20 (sidestand switch :option)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Connected state of connector
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
(blue/yellow connector)
2 Open or short circuit in wiring harness and/or sub lead.
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D20)
Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Repair or replace if there is an open circuit.
Between main switch coupler and ECU coupler. blue/yellow - blue/yellow
Sidestand switch signal input line of main switch coupler. blue/green - blue/green
Reinstatement method
7-16
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 21 Symptom Coolant temperature sensor open or short circuit is detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D06 (coolant temperature sensor)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Installed condition of sensor Check the installed area for looseness or pinching.
4
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Coolant temperature sensor coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Defective coolant temperature sensor.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between sensor coupler and ECU coupler black/blue-black/blue green/red - green/red
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No.D06)
Replace if defective.
Refer to “COOLING SYSTEM” in chapter 8.
Reinstatement method
7-17
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 22 Symptom Intake temperature sensor open or short circuit is detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D05 (intake air temperature sensor)
Order
1
2
3
4
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Reinstatement method
Installed condition of sensor Check the installed area for looseness or pinching.
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
Open or short circuit in wireing harness and/or sub lead.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Intake air temperature sensor coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Sub-wire harness coupler
Defective intake air temperature sensor.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between sensor coupler and ECU coupler black/blue - black/blue brown/white - brown/white
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D05)
Replace the throttle body.
NOTE:
Do not remove the sensor assembly (MAQS).
Reinstated by turning the main switch
ON.
1 . Connect the digital circuit tester to the intake air temperature sensor terminal as shown.
Positive tester probe -» brown/white 1
Negative tester probe -» black/blue 2
2. Measure the intake air temperature sensor resistance. n„
Intake air temperature sensor resistance
2.4~2.9k at 20°C (68°F)
w
8 Handle the intake air temperature sensor with special care.
8 Never subject the intake air temperature sensor to strong shocks. If the intake air temperature sensor is dropped, replace it.
3. Is the intake air temperature sensor OK?
7-18
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 30 Symptom The vehicle has overturned.
Used diagnostic code No. D08 (lean angle cut-off switch)
Order
1
2
3
4
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Reinstatement method
The vehicle has overturned. Raise the vehicle upright.
Installed condition of the lean angle cut-off switch
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
Defective lean angle cut-off switch
Check the installed area for looseness or pinching.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Lean angle cut-off switch coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D08)
Replace if defective.
1 . Remove the lean angle cut-off switch from the vehicle.
2. Connect the lean angle cut-off switch coupler to the wire harness.
3. Connect the digital circuit tester to the lean angle cut-off switch terminals as shown.
Reinstated by turning the main switch
ON (however, the engine cannot be restarted unless the main switch is first turned OFF).
4. When turning the lean angle cut-off switch approximately 65°, the voltage reading change from 0.4 V to 4.4 V.
5. Is the lean angle cut-off switch OK?
7-19
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault codeNo. 33 Symptom Open circuit detected in the primary lead of the ignition coil.
Used diagnostic code No. D30
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Ignition coil primary side coupler - orange
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in lead. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between ignition coil coupler and ECU coupler/main harness orange - orange
3 Defective ignition coil (test the primary and secondary coils for continuity).
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D30)
Replace if defective.
Refer to “IGNITION SYSTEM” in chapter 8.
Reinstatement method
Reinstated by starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Fault code No. 37 Symptom Engine speed is high when the engine is idling.
Used diagnostic code No. D54 (ISC (idle speed control) valve)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Incorrect speed sensor signal Check the speed sensor.
Check the speed sensor leads.
Check the speed sensor coupler.
Throttle valve does not fully close
Check the throttle body.
Refer to “THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY AND
FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY” .
Check the throttle cables.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE
CABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
ISC (idle speed control) valve stuck fully open
The ISC (idle speed control) valve is stuck fully open if it does not operate when the main switch is set to OFF.
(Touch the ISC (idle speed control) valve unit with your hand and check if it is vibrating to confirm if the ISC (idle speed control) valve is operating.)
NOTE:
Do not remove the ISC (idle speed control) valve unit.
Reinstatement method
ISC (idle speed control) valve not moving correctly
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D54)
After the ISC (idle speed control) valve is fully closed, it opens until it is at the standby opening position when the engine is started. This operation takes approximately 3 seconds until it is completed. Start the engine. If the error recurs, replace the throttle body assembly.
7-20
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 39 Symptom Fuel injector open or short circuit is detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D36 (fuel injector)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
3
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Fuel injector coupler - orange/black
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in lead wire.
Defective fuel injector
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between fuel injector coupler and ECU coupler/main harness orange/black - orange/black
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D36)
Replace if defective.
Reinstatement method
Reinstated by starting the engine.
Fault code No. 41 Symptom Lean angle cut-off switch open or short circuit is detected.
Used diagnostic code No. D08 (lean angle cut-off switch)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Lean angle cut-off switch coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between switch coupler and ECU coupler black/blue - black/blue yellow/green - yellow/green blue- blue
3 Defective lean angle cut-off switch
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D08)
Replace if defective.
Refer to Fault code No. 30.
Reinstatement method
Reinstated by turning the main switch
ON.
7-21
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 42 Symptom No normal signals are received from the speed sensor.
Used diagnostic code No. D07 (speed sensor)
Order
1
2
3
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Reinstatement method
Connected condition of speedometer connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
Speedometer coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in speedometer lead.
Breakage speedometer cable or speedometer gear unit.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between speedometer coupler and ECU coupler white - white black/blue - black/blue
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No.D07)
Checking the speedometer cable breakage and loose connection.
Checking the movement of the speedometer gear unit 1 .
Checking the breakage of the speedometer clutch projections a and speedometer gear unit slots b .
Reinstated by inputting the vehicle speed signals by turning the front wheel.
4 Defective speed sensor. Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D07)
Replace the meter assembly.
7-22
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 43 Symptom
Power supply to the fuel injector, fuel pump and ignistion coil are not normal.
Used diagnostic code No. D09 (fuel system voltage)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Reinstatement method
3
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
Faulty battery
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
Replace or charge the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY” in chapter 3.
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D09)
NOTE:
When the leads are disconnected, the voltage check by the code No. D09 is impossable.
Reinstated by starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
8 Between battery and main switch red-red
8 Between main switch and handlebar switch
(engine stop switch) brown-brown
8 Between handlebar switch (engine stop switch) and ECU red/white-red/black
Error is detected while reading from or writing on EEROM (code re-
Fault code No. 44 Symptom registering key code and throttle valve fully closed notification valve).
Used diagnostic code No. D60 (EEPROM improper cylinder indication)
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Reinstatement method
1 Malfunction in ECU Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. D60)
8 01 is displayed on meter.
Readjust the CO of the displayed cylinder.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE EXHAUST
GAS VOLUME” in chapter 3.
Replace ECU if defective.
Reinstated by turning the main switch
ON.
7-23
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 46 Symptom Power supply to FI system is not normal. (red lead)
Used diagnostic code No. --
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
4
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
ECU coupler
Faulty battery
Malfunction in rectifier/ regulator
Open or short circuit in wiring harness.
Replace or charge the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY” in chapter 3.
Replace if defective.
Refer to “CHARGING SYSTEM” in chapter 8.
Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between battery and ECU red-red
Reinstatement method
Fault code No. 50 Symptom
Faulty ECU memory. (when this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the fault code number might not appear on the meter.)
Used diagnostic code No. --
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
1 Malfunction in ECU
Operation item and countermeasure
Replace the ECU.
Reinstatement method
Reinstated by turning the main switch
ON.
7-24
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
Fault code No. 61 Symptom ISC (idle speed control) valve open or short circuit is detected.
Used diagnostic code No. --
Order
Inspection operation item and probable cause
Operation item and countermeasure
Connected condition of connector
Inspect the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out.
Check the locking condition of the coupler.
If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect it securely.
ISC (idle speed control) valve coupler
Main wiring harness ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in lead. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit.
Between ISC (idle speed control) valve and
ECU coupler/main harness pink- pink green/yellow-green/yellow gray - gray sky blue-sky blue
3 Detective ISC (idle speed control) valve
Execute diagnostic mode (code No.D54)
Replace the throttle body.
NOTE:
Do not remove the ISC (idle speed control) valve.
Reinstatement method
Reinstated by setting the main switch to ON, The ISC (idle speed control) valve fully closes, and then it opens until it is at the standby opening position when the engine is started.
Refer to “THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL IN-
JECTOR ”.
7-25
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
EAS00909
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
THROTTLE BODY
FI ifl
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
Job/Part
Removing the throttle body
Side cover(left and right)
Single seat/Trunk
Air filter assembly
Throttle body clamp screw
MAQS(modulated air quantity sensor) coupler
ISC (idle speed control) valve coupler
Throttle cable
Throttle body
Sub-wire harness
Q’ty
1
1
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
Refer to"ENGINE REMOVAL" in chapter 5.
Lossen.
Disconnect.
1
2
1
1
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
7-26
THROTTLE BODYAND FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL HOSE
FI ifl
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Order Job/Part
Removing the fuel injector and fuel hose
Footrest board
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to”COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
Disconnect.
Fuel pump coupler
Fuel hose connector cover
Fuel hose connector
Fuel hose holder(to frame)
Fuel hose holder(to intake manifold)
Clamp
Fuel injector coupler
Fuel injector
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Open lock.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
7-27
FUEL TANK
THROTTLE BODYAND FUEL INJECTOR
FI ifl
«& 4Nm(0.4m • kg, 2.9 ft • lb)
Order Job/Part
Removing the fuel tank
Fuel hose
1 Fuel tank
2 Fuel pump
7-28
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Place the scooter on a suitable stand.
Refer to “FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL
HOSE”.
1 Refer to “REMOVING THE FUEL
HOSE”.
1 Refer to “REMOVING THE FUEL
PUMP”and “INSTALLING THE FUEL
PUMP”.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
FI ifl
REMOVING THE FUEL HOSE
1. Extract the fuel in the fuel tank through the fuel tank filler hole with a pump.
2. Remove:
8fuel hose connector cover 1
3. Disconnect:
8fuel hose 2 c C
8 Be sure to disconnect the fuel hose by hand. Do not forcefully disconnect the hose with tools.
8 Although the fuel has been removed from the fuel tank, be careful when removing the fuel hose, since there may be fuel remaining in it.
8 Do not disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel hose connector. Disconnect the connector from the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Before removing the hose, place a few rags in the area under where it will be removed.
3. Remove:
8fuel tank
REMOVING THE FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect:
8 fuel pump coupler
8 fuel hose
2. Remove:
8 fuel pump c C
8 Do not drop the fuel pump or give it a strong shock.
8 Do not touch the base section of the fuel sender.
EAS00911 c C
The fuel pump should not be disassembled.
7-29
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
FI ifl
EAS00912
CHECKING THE FUEL INJECTOR
1. Check:
8 fuel injector
Damage -» Replace.
EAS00913
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY
1. Check:
8 throttle body
Cracks/damage -» Replace the throttle body.
2. Check:
8 butterfly valve
Damage/scratches/wear -» Replace.
C
Do not adjust the stop screw 1
Do not clean the throttle body using carburetor cleaner or compressed air.
When replace the throttle body, the main switch is operated three times turn ON and OFF position.
(ON position : 3 seconds more, OFF position : 3seconds more). And then, start the engine and keep idling at 10 minutes more.
7-30
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
FI
INSTALLING THE FUEL PUMP
1. Install:
8 fuel pump
X | 4Nm(0.4m
» kg, 2.9ft
* Ib)
ifl
NOTE:
8 Do not damage the installation surfaces of the fuel tank when installing the fuel pump.
8 Always use a new fuel pump gasket.
8 Align the projection a on the fuel pump with the alignment mark b on the fuel tank.
8 Tighten the fuel pump bolts in the proper tightening sequence as shown and torque them in two stages.
A Forward
INSTALLING THE FUEL HOSE
1. Install:
8fuel hose
8fuel hose connector cover c C
Be sure to connect the fuel hose securely and install the fuel hose connector cover in the correct position, otherwise the fuel hose will not be properly installed.
NOTE:
8 Install the fuel hose connector securely onto the fuel tank until a distinct “click” is heard, and then make sure that it does not come loose.
8 After installing the fuel hose connector cover 1 , make sure that it is installed securely.
7-31
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
FI ifl
EAS00915
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP AND PRES-
SURE REGULATOR OPERATION
1. Check:
8 pressure regulator operation
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Remove the footrest board.
Refer to “COVER AND PANEL” in chapter
3. b. Remove the fuel hose connector cover (T) and disconnect the fuel hose (2) from the fuel pump.
C
Although the fuel has been removed from the fuel tank, be careful when removing the fuel hose, since there may be fuel remaining in it.
NOTE:
Before removing the hose, place a few rags in the area under where it will be removed. c. Connect the pressure gauge (3) and adapter
(4) onto the fuel hose.
(tj//^ Pressure gauge
/f~"^ 90890-03153
YU-03153
Adapter
90890-03181 d. Start the engine. e. Measure the fuel pressure.
^
Fuel pressure
246 ~ 254 kPa
(2.46 ~ 2.54 kg/cm
2
, 35.0 ~ 36.1 psi)
Faulty -» Replace the fuel pump.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7-32
EAS0091 6
CHECKING THE THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR
1 . Check:
8throttle position sensor
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Connect the digital circuit tester to the terminals of the throttle position sensor.
FI ifl
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
Positive tester probe -> blue terminal ®
Negative tester probe -» black/blue terminal (2) f*
Digital circuit tester
90890-03174 b. Measure the throttle position sensor voltage.
Out of specification -» Replace or repair the wire harness.
U Throttle position sensor voltage
5V
(blue-black/blue) c. Connect the digital circuit tester to the terminals of the throttle position sensor.
Positive tester probed yellow terminal
Negative tester probe black/blue terminal d. While slowly opening the throttle, check that the throttle position sensor voltage is increased.
Voltage does not change or it changes abruptly -» Replace the throttle body.
Out of specification (closed position) -» Replace the throttle body.
Bl Throttle position sensor voltage
(closed position)
0.63 ~ 0.73 V
(yellow-black/blue)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7-33
THROTTLE BODY AND FUEL INJECTOR
FI ifl
EAS00916
CHECKING THE ISC (IDLE SPEED CON-
TROL) VALVE
NOTE:
Do not remove the ISC (idle speed control) valve unit completely from the throttle body assembly.
1 . Check:
8ISC (idle speed control) valve
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Disconnect the ISC (idle speed control) valve coupler from the ISC (idle speed control) valve. b. Connect the digital circuit tester to the terminals of the ISC (idle speed control) valve.
Positive tester probe -> pink terminal ©
Negative tester probe -> green/yellow terminal 2
Positive tester probe -> gray terminal ®
Negative tester probe -> sky blue terminal
©
Digital circuit tester
90890-03174 c. Measure the ISC (idle speed control) valve resistance.
Out of specification -» Replace the throttle body. a
ISC (idle speed control) valve resistance
18 ~ 22 at 20°C(68°F)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7-34
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
EAS00507
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
AIR INJECTION
The air induction system burns unburned exhaust gases by injecting fresh air (secondary air) into the exhaust pipe reducing the emission of hydrocarbons.
When there is negative pressure at the exhaust port, the reed valve opens, allowing secondary air to flow into the exhaust port. The resuired temperature for burning the unburned exhaust gases is approximately 600 to 700 °C (1,112 to
1,292 °F)
E
0 r
" ) w
$
E
1
L J
// h z
M
1
"
?
EAS00917
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE
The air cut-off valve prevents air backflow from the exhaust pipe to the air filter.
A From the air filter
B To the exhaust pipe ass’y
7-35
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
EAS00509
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
1 Air induction system hose
2 Air filter case
3 Air induction system hose (air filter case to air cut-off valve)
4 Air cut-off valve
5 Air induction system hose (air cut-off valve to exhaust pipe)
FI ifl
7-36
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE AND AIR FILTER CASE
FI ifl
PV 7Nm(0.7m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)
3R 7Nm(0.7m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)
Order Job/Part
Q’ty
1
2
Removing the air cut-off valve and air filter case
Front cover
Side cover(right)
Hose(to air filter case)
Air filter case
1
1
3 Hose(air cut-off valve to air filter case) 1
4 Hose(air cut-off valve assembly to ex1 haust pipe)
5 Air cut-off valve 1
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
7-37
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
FI ifl
EAS00918
CHECKING THE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
1. Check:
• hoses
Loose connection -» Connect properly.
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
2. Check:
• reed valve
• reed valve stopper
• reed valve seat
Cracks/damage -» Replace the reed valve.
3. Check:
• air cut-off valve
Cracks/damage -» Replace.
7-38
ELEC
- +
CHAPTER 8
ELECTORICAL
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 8-1
WIRING DIAGRAM 8-2
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY 8-4
CHECKING THE SWITCHES 8-5
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS 8-6
TYPES OF BULBS 8-6
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULBS 8-7
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB SOCKETS 8-8
IGNITION SYSTEM 8-9
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-9
TROUBLESHOOTING 8-10
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM 8-14
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-14
STARTING CIRCUIT CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATION 8-15
TROUBLESHOOTING 8-16
STARTER MOTOR 8-20
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR 8-21
ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR 8-23
CHARGING SYSTEM 8-24
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-24
TROUBLESHOOTING 8-25
LIGHTING SYSTEM 8-27
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-27
TROUBLESHOOTING 8-28
CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM 8-30
SIGNALING SYSTEM 8-34
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-34
TROUBLESHOOTING 8-35
CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM 8-36
COOLING SYSTEM 8-42
TROUBLESHOOTING 8-43
CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM 8-45
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
ELEC
EAS00729
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1 Main switch
2 Front brake light switch
3 Rectifier/regulator
4 Rear brake light switch
5 Battery
6 Main fuse
7 ECU
8 Coolant temperature sensor
9 Ignition coil
0 Spark plug cap q Fuel pump w Starter relay e Horn r Turn signal relay t Starting circuit cut-off relay y Stator coil u Wire harness
+i
8-1
WIRING DIAGRAM
ELEC +i
WIRING DIAGRAM
Lg
P/W
Y x Br/W
R/B x x
B/L B/W
W/R
L/Y
W B/R
X f\ B/Y L / B
G/Y Sb
P
B B x
^
4= rHi'
<— go nrn
T ^ h
' Br T ( (
< p -
>
) j —
/R ~f| I
@
Y L
Br/W
^x^
B/L
Br/W B/L
< P/W x
Y
r-rrriTTT—rr
8-2 gSj
1 AC magneto
2 Rectifier/regulator
3 Main fuse
4 Battery
5 Starter relay
6 Starter motor
7 Start switch
8 Engine stop switch
9 ECU
0 Main switch q Intake air pressure sensor w Intake air temperature sensor e Throttle position sensor r Lean angle cut-off switch t Coolant temperature sensor y Ignition coil u Spark plug i Fuel injector o Fuel pump p ISC(idle speed control) valve a Horn switch s Dimmer switch d Turn signal switch f Headlight g Tail/brake light h Front brake light switch j Rear brake light switch k Horn l Turn signal relay
; Front turn signal light(left) z Front turn signal light(right) x Fuel level meter c High beam indicator light v Speedometer light b Engine trouble warning light n Coolant temperature indicator light m Speed sensor
, Turn signal indicator light
.
FI diagnostic tool(optional)
/ Sidestand switch (optional)
!
Rear turn signal light(left)
@ Rear turn signal light(right)
# License plate light
$ Starting circuit cut-off relay
% Connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
COLOR CODE
B Black
Br Brown
Ch Chocolate
Dg Dark green
G Green
Gy Gray
L Blue
Lg Light green
Or Orange
P Pink
R Red
Sb Sky blue
W White
Y Yellow
B/L Black/Blue
B/G Black/Green
B/R Black/Red
B/W Black/White
B/Y Black/Yellow
G/R Green/Red
G/Y Green/Yellow
G/W Green/White
L/B Blue/Black
L/G Blue/Green
L/W Blue/White
L/Y Blue/Yellow
Or/B Orange/Black
P/W Pink/White
R/B Red/Black
R/L Red/Blue
R/W Red/White
W/L White/Blue
W/R White/Red
Y/G Yellow/Green
Br/W .... Brown/White
Br/L Brown/Blue
8-3
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY
EAS00730
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY
Check each switch for continuity with the pocket tester. If the continuity reading is incorrect, check the wiring connections and if necessary, replace the switch. c C
Never insert the tester probes into the coupler terminal slots. Always insert the probes from the opposite end of the coupler, taking care not to loosen or damage the leads.
Pocket tester
90890-03132 (YU-03112-C)
NOTE:
8 Before checking for continuity, set the pocket tester to “0” and to the “ Q x 1” range.
8 When checking for continuity, switch back and forth between the switch positions a few times.
The terminal connections for switches (e.g., main switch, engine stop switch) are shown in an illustration similar to the one on the left.
The switch positions a are shown in the far left column and the switch lead colors b are shown in the top row in the switch illustration.
NOTE:
“ O O ” indicates a continuity of electricity between switch terminals (i.e., a closed circuit at the respective switch position).
The example illustration on the left shows that:
There is continuity between black and black/ white when the switch is set to “OFF”.
There is continuity between red and brown when the switch is set to “ON”.
8-4
CHECKING THE SWITCHES
ELEC + 1
EAS00731
CHECKING THE SWITCHES
Check each switch for damage or wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the terminals. Refer to “CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY”.
Damage/wear -» Repair or replace.
Improperly connected -» Properly connect.
Incorrect continuity reading -» Replace the switch.
1
9 t
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
©
G Y o o
O O
©
P B
OFF
PUSH O O
©
Ch Dg
L
N
R o o o o
\
Br
/
L
R
R
/
B
B
LOCK
OFF
ON oo O O
R Br/L
R/B B
(RED)
Br
OFF
RUN O O
B
OFF
START o o
®
L/W Br
B R/W
©
V B B
5
D
A
D
U U
1 Rear brake light switch 5
2 Dimmer switch 6
3 Horn switch 7
4 Turn signal switch 8
9 Front brake light switch
0 Sidestand switch (optional)
8-5
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS
EAS00733
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB
SOCKETS
Check each bulb and bulb socket for damage or wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the terminals.
Damage/wear -» Repair or replace the bulb, bulb socket or both.
Improperly connected -» Properly connect.
No continuity -» Repair or replace the bulb, bulb socket or both.
TYPES OF BULBS
The bulbs used on this scooter are shown in the illustration on the left.
8Bulbs A and B are used for the headlights and usually use a bulb holder that must be detached before removing the bulb. The majority of these types of bulbs can be removed from their respective socket by turning them counterclockwise.
8Bulbs C is used for turn signal and tail/ brake lights and can be removed from the socket by pushing and turning the bulb counterclockwise.
8Bulbs D and E are used for meter and indicator lights and can be removed from their respective socket by carefully pulling them out.
8-6
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE
BULBS
The following procedure applies to all of the bulbs.
1 . Remove:
8bulb w
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot, keep flammable products and your hands away from the bulb until it has cooled down. c C
Be sure to hold the socket firmly when removing the bulb. Never pull the lead, otherwise it may be pulled out of the terminal in the coupler.
Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise the transparency of the glass, the life of the bulb, and the luminous flux will be adversely affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled, thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquer thinner.
2. Check:
8 bulb (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity -» Replace.
^
Pocket tester
90890-03112 (YU-03112-C)
NOTE:
Before checking for continuity, set the pocket tester to “0” and to the “ × 1” range.
8-7
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Connect the positive tester probe to terminal 1 and the negative tester probe to terminal 2 , and check the continuity. b. Connect the positive tester probe to terminal 1 and the negative tester probe to terminal 3 , and check the continuity. c. If either of the readings indicate no continuity, replace the bulb.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB
SOCKETS
The following procedure applies to all of the bulb sockets.
1. Check:
• bulb socket (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity -» Replace.
Pocket tester
90890-03112 (YU-03112-C)
NOTE:
Check each bulb socket for continuity in the same manner as described in the bulb section; however, note the following.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a. Install a good bulb into the bulb socket. b. Connect the pocket tester probes to the respective leads of the bulb socket. c. Check the bulb socket for continuity. If any of the readings indicate no continuity, replace the bulb socket.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8-8
EAS00734
IGNITION SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
IGNITION SYSTEM
ELEC +i
-•-
1,®
8-9
EAS00736
TROUBLESHOOTING
The ignition system fails to operate (no spark or intermittent spark).
Check:
1 . main fuse
2. battery
3. spark plug
4. ignition spark gap
5. spark plug cap resistance
6. ignition coil resistance
7. crankshaft position sensor resistance
8. main switch
9. engine stop switch
10. sidestand switch(optional)
11. lean angle cut-off switch
12. wiring connections (of the entire ignition system)
NOTE:
8 Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1 . Battery cover
2. Front cover
3. Side cover (right)
8 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
Ignition checker
90890-06754
YM-34487
Pocket tester
90890-03112
YU-03112-C
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS00738
1. Main Fuse
• Check the fuse for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” in chapter 3.
* Is the fuse OK?
V
YES
4
NO
Replace the fuse.
EAS00739
2. Battery
• Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3. a
Minimum open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the battery OK?
V
YES
I
NO
• Clean the battery terminals.
• Recharge or replace the battery.
EAS00740
3. Spark plug
• Check the condition of the spark plug.
• Check the spark plug type.
• Measure the spark plug gap.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG” in chapter 3.
Standard spark plug
CR7E (NGK)
Spark plug gap
0.7 ~ 0.8 mm(0.028 ~ 0.031 in)
• Is the spark plug in good condition, is it of the correct type, and is its gap within specification?
-i YES
\7
NO
I
Re-gap or replace the spark plug.
8-10
EAS00742
4. Ignition spark gap
Disconnect the spark plug cap from the spark plug.
Connect the ignition checker 1 as shown.
2 Spark plug cap
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Measure the ignition spark gap a .
Crank the engine by pushing the starter switch and gradually increase the spark gap until a misfire occurs.
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS00744
5. Spark plug cap resistance
• Remove the spark plug cap from the spark plug lead.
• Connect the pocket tester (“ Q x 1k” range) to the spark plug cap as shown.
• Measure the spark plug cap resistance.
Minimum ignition spark gap
6 mm(0.24 in)
• Is there a spark and is the spark gap within specification?
NO
* ft YES
The ignition system is
OK. a
Spark plug cap resistance
4~6 k at 20°C(68°F)
• Is the spark plug cap OK?
V
YES 4 NO
Replace the spark plug cap.
EAS00746
6. Ignition coil resistance
• Disconnect the ignition coil connectors from the ignition coil terminals.
• Connect the pocket tester ( Q x 1) to the ignition coil as shown.
Positive tester probe -» orange ®
Negative tester probe -> red/black
8-11
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS00748
7. Crankshaft position sensor resistance
• Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor coupler from the wire harness.
• Connect the pocket tester ( £2 x 100) to the crankshaft position sensor coupler as shown.
Positive tester probe g white/red 1
Negative tester probe g white/blue 2
• Measure the primary coil resistance. a
Primary coil resistance
2.16 ~ 2.64 at 20°C(68°F)
• Connect the pocket tester ( £1 x 1k) to the ignition coil as shown.
Negative tester probe g orange 2
Positive tester probe g spark plug lead 1
• Measure the secondary coil resistance. m
Secondary coil resistance
8.64 ~ 12.96 k at 20°C(68°F)
• Is the ignition coil OK?
4 YES NO 4
Replace the ignition coil.
• Measure the crankshaft position sensor resistance.
SI
Crankshaft position sensor resistance
248 ~ 372 at 20°C(68°F)
(between white/red and white/ blue)
• Is the crankshaft position sensor OK?
4
YES
I
NO
Replace the crankshaft position sensor/stator assembly.
EAS00749
8. Main switch
• Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the main switch OK?
YES NO
Replace the main switch.
8-12
EAS00750
9. Engine stop switch
• Check the engine stop switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the engine stop switch OK?
V
YES NO 4
Replace the right handlebar switch.
IGNITION SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00752
10. Sidestand switch(optional)
• Check the sidestand switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the sidestand switch OK?
NO
V
YES
Replace the sidestand switch.
11. Lean angle cut-off switch
• Remove the lean angle cut-off switch.
• Connect the pocket tester( £2 x 1) to the lean angle cut-off switch terminals as shown.
Positive tester probe -> blue ©
Negative tester probe -> yellow/green
/ \ x
< • / / / / ,
X
V
YES NO
*
Replace the lean angle cut-off switch.
EAS00754
12. Wiring
• Check the entire ignition system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
• Is the ignition system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
YES NO
V
I
Replace the ECU. Properly connect or repair the ignition system’s wiring. m
Lean angle cut-off switch voltage
Less than 65° ®-» 0.4~1.4V
More than 65° © -» 3.7~4.4V
8-13
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00755
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Main fuse
Battery
Starter relay
Starter motor
Start switch
Engine stop switch
Main switch
8-14
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS00756
STARTING CIRCUIT CUT-OFF SYSTEM OP-
ERATION
If the engine stop switch is set to “ # ” and the main switch is set to “ON” (both switches are closed), the starter motor can only operate if at least one of the following conditions is met:
8 The brake lever(front or rear) is pulled to the handlebar(the brake light switch is closed) and the sidestand(optional) is up(the sidestand switch(optional) is closed).
1 Battery
2 Main fuse
3 Main switch
4 Front brake light switch
5 Rear brake light switch
6 Engine stop switch
7 Starting circuit cut-off relay
8 Sidestand switch(optional)
9 Start switch
0 Starter relay q Starter motor
8-15
EAS00757
TROUBLESHOOTING
The starter motor fails to turn.
Check:
1 . main fuse
2. battery
3. starter motor
4. starting circuit cut-off relay
5. starter relay
6. main switch
7. brake light switch(front and rear)
8. engine stop switch
9. sidestand switch(optional)
10.start switch
11.wiring connections
(of the entire starting system)
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS00738
1. Main Fuse
• Check the fuse for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” in chapter 3.
* Is the fuse OK?
V
YES
4
NO
Replace the fuse.
EAS00739
2. Battery
• Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3. NOTE:
8 Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1 . battery cover/front cover
2. side cover(left and right)
3. front fork upper cover
4. front fork cover(left and right)
5. leg shield1
6. air filter assembly
8 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
Pocket tester
90890-03112 (YU-03112-C)
II Minimum open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the battery OK?
V
YES
4
NO
• Clean the battery terminals.
• Recharge or replace the battery.
8-16
EAS00758
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC +1 I
EAS00759
4. Starting circuit cut-off relay
• Remove the starting circuit cut-off relay.
• Connect the pocket tester ( Q x 1) and battery (12 V) to the starting circuit cut-off relay coupler as shown.
Positive battery terminal -» red/white ®
Negative battery terminal -> light green
Positive tester probe -» green/yellow ®
Negative tester probe -> green/yellow ®
1 3 w
8 A wire that is used as a jumper lead must have at least the same capacity or more as that of the battery lead, otherwise the jumper lead may burn.
8 This check is likely to produce sparks, therefore make sure nothing flammable is in the vicinity.
• Does the starter motor turn?
0 YES NO I
Repair or replace the starter motor.
2 4
• Does the starting circuit cut-off relay have continuity between green/yellow and green/ yellow?
&
YES NO l
Replace the starting circuit cut-off relay
8-17
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00761
5. Starter relay
• Remove the starter relay .
• Connect the pocket tester ( Q x 1) and battery (12 V) to the starter relay coupler as shown.
EAS00751
7. Brake light switch(front and rear)
• Check the brake light switches for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is each brake light switch OK?
Positive battery terminal ^green/yellow ©
Negative battery terminal -» blue/white (2)
Positive tester probe -» red (3)
Negative tester probe -» red (4)
V
YES NO I
Replace the brake light switch(es).
EAS00750
8. Engine stop switch
• Check the engine stop switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the engine stop switch OK?
V
YES NO
*
Replace the right handlebar switch.
V
YES NO 4
Replace the starter relay.
EAS00749
6. Main switch
• Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the main switch OK?
V
YES
EAS00752
9. Sidestand switch(optional)
• Check the sidestand switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the sidestand switch OK?
V
YES
NO 4
Replace the main switch.
I NO
Replace the sidestand switch.
EAS00764
10. Start switch
• Check the start switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the start switch OK?
V
YES NO
Replace the right handlebar switch.
8-18
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS00766
11. Wiring
• Check the entire starting system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
• Is the starting system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
YES
V
The starting system circuit is OK.
*
NO
Properly connect or repair the starting system’s wiring.
8-19
EAS00767
STARTER MOTOR
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
® MM
®
Order Job/Part
Removing the starter motor
Front cover
Single seat/Trunk
Air filter assembly
1
2
Starter motor lead coupler
Starter motor
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Disassembling the starter motor
O-ring
Gasket
Stator assembly
O-ring
Armature coil
Brush
Plate washer
Bracket
8-20
Q’ty
1
1
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “COVER AND PANEL”in chapter 3.
Refer to“ENGINE REMOVAL”in chapter
5.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
Disassemble the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Refer to“ASSEMBLING THE STARTER
MOTOR”.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC + 1
EAS00769
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR
1. Check:
• commutator
Dirt -» Clean with 600-grit sandpaper.
2. Measure:
• commutator diameter a
Out of specification -» Replace the starter motor.
Commutator wear limit
16.6 mm (0.65 in)
3. Measure:
• mica undercut a
Out of specification -» Scrape the mica to the proper measurement with a hacksaw blade that has been grounded to fit the commutator.
Mica undercut
1.35 mm (0.05 in)
NOTE:
The mica of the commutator must be undercut to ensure proper operation of the commutator.
8-21
4. Measure:
• armature assembly resistances (commutator and insulation)
Out of specification -» Replace the starter motor.
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T a. Measure the armature assembly resistances with the pocket tester.
Pocket tester
90890-03112 (YU-03112-C) a
Armature coil
Commutator resistance 1
0.0378 ~ 0.0462 at 20°C (68°F)
Insulation resistance 2
Above 1 M at 20°C(68°F)
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i b. If any resistance is out of specification, replace the starter motor.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5. Measure:
• brush length a
Out of specification -» Replace the brushes as a set.
Brush length wear limit
3.5 mm (0.14 in)
6. Measure:
• brush spring force
Out of specification -» Replace the brush springs as a set.
Brush spring force
3.92 ~ 5.88N(400 ~ 600gf, 14.11 ~
21.16oz)
7. Check:
• gear teeth
Damage/wear -» Replace the gear.
8. Check:
• bearing ©
• oil seal ©
• bush (3)
Damage/wear -» Replace.
8-22
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00772
ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR
1. Install:
8brush seat 1
2. Install:
8 w a s h e r 1
8armature coil 2
8o-ing New 3
8stator assembly 4
3 . Install:
• bracket
• bolts (T)
X I 5 Nm (0.5 m * kg, 3.6 ft * lb)
NOTE:
Align the match marks a on the starter motor yoke with the match marks b on the bracket.
8-23
CHARGING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00773
CHARGING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
X
Y
R/B x x
B/L l-l Lg
R L/Y
W B/R
B/Y
G/Y x
LB
Sb
Gy
P
B
Or
B x
X
-vJHHL/-'
E _ r i«
£1
1 ^ h B
Br 1 1 C r y J
/R —111
© a
I
I Y
©
©
AC magneto
Rectifier/regulator
Main fuse
Battery nrn
—LIUL U - l
-rfrffr-rr
it nrr
0 @ ©@©
JL
L i " j
LVlAr
1
B/L
G/R [J -=r L
B/L
^ I P/W
Br l(S)
— Dg 4
12V10W ii
Ch
12V10W
G/Y
EH
R/W .] W (vfliL/1—I" Lg
• G/Y
L / G
(§)l
1 m rr
# G?
L/W
R/W
Br
— 1 O
J O
1— G/Y —
Br — l - ^ H B
Br/L
^ f if
L H K C 1 — © — r > | h B
@ l
Dg
Ch
©I
D g ^
12V10W fa>
— Ch -L-
12V10W i]M
12V35/35W
-i © i n
J J
R 1 O-^O h R - • R ~(Q) I I I (0)~
I (CO) 15A I T ' ' ' J
8-24
EAS00774
TROUBLESHOOTING
The battery is not being charged.
Check:
1 . main fuse
2. battery
3. charging voltage
4. stator coil resistance
5. wiring connections
(of the entire charging system)
NOTE:
8 Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1 . battery cover/front cover
2. side cover(right)
3. front fork upper cover
4. front fork cover(left and right)
5. leg shield1
8 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
CHARGING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00739
2. Battery
• Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3. a
Minimum open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the battery OK?
V
YES
I
NO
• Clean the battery terminals.
• Recharge or replace the battery.
EAS00775
3. Charging voltage
• Connect the digital tachometer to the spark plug lead of cylinder.
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the battery as shown.
Digital tachometer
90890-06760
Pocket tester
90890-03112
YU-03112-C
Positive tester probe terminal
Negative tester probe terminal positive battery negative battery
EAS00738
1 . Main fuse
• Check the fuse for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” in chapter 3.
• Is the fuse OK?
YES
V
NO
*
Replace the fuse.
• Start the engine and let it run at approximately 5,000 r/min.
• Measure the charging voltage. a
Charging voltage
14 V at 5000r/min
8-25
NOTE:
Make sure the battery is fully charged.
• Is the charging voltage within specification?
*
NO YES l z
The charging circuit is
OK.
EAS00776
4. Stator coil resistance
• Disconnect the starter coil coupler from wireharness.
• Connect the pocket tester ( Q x 1) to the stator coil as shown.
CHARGING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00779
5. Wiring
• Check the wiring connections of the entire charging system.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
• Is the charging system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
YES
V
Replace the rectifier/regulator.
4
NO
Properly connect or repair the charging system’s wiring.
Positive tester probe -» white 1
Negative tester probe -> white 2
• Measure the stator coil resistances.
SI Stator coil resistance
0.28 ~ 0.42 at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the stator coil OK?
V
YES NO 4
Replace the crankshaft position sensor/ stator coil assembly.
8-26
EAS00780
LIGHTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
LIGHTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
Y
Br/W
L x
B/L
< v
B/L x
I ! -H •
8-27
EAS00781
TROUBLESHOOTING
Any of the following fail to light: headlight, high beam indicator light, taillight, license plate light or meter light.
Check:
1 . main fuse
2. battery
3. main switch
4. dimmer switch
5. wiring connections
(of the entire lighting system)
`
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EAS00739
2. Battery
• Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3. a
Minimum open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the battery OK?
YES
V
NO X
• Clean the battery terminals.
• Recharge or replace the battery.
NOTE:
8 Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1 . battery cover/front cover
2. side cover(right)
3. front fork upper cover
4. front fork cover(left and right)
5. leg shield1
8 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
EAS00749
3. Main switch
• Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the main switch OK? y*
Pocket tester
90890-03112
YU-03112-C
V
YES NO
\
Replace the main switch.
EAS00738
1 . Main fuse
• Check the fuse for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” in chapter 3.
• Is the fuse OK?
YES
V
NO X
Replace the fuse.
EAS00784
4. Dimmer switch
• Check the dimmer switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the dimmer switch OK? r-i YES
V
NO
X
The dimmer switch is faulty. Replace the left handlebar switch.
8-28
EAS00787
5. Wiring
• Check the entire lighting system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
• Is the lighting system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
YES NO
V *
Check the condition of each of the lighting system’s circuits.
Refer to “CHECK-
ING THE LIGHT-
ING SYSTEM”.
Properly connect or repair the lighting system’s wiring.
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8-29
EAS00788
CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM
1 . The headlight and the high beam indicator light fail to come on.
LIGHTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
3. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the headlight and high beam indicator light couplers as shown.
1 . Headlight bulb and socket
• Check the headlight bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the headlight bulb and socket OK?
AWhen the dimmer switch is set to “ % ”
BWhen the dimmer switch is set to “ & ”
Headlight
Positive tester probe
2
Negative tester probe yellow 1 or green black/green 3
V
YES NO
*
Replace the headlight bulb, socket or both.
Headlight coupler
A
DC 20V
- © +
®
2. High beam indicator light bulb and socket
• Check the high beam indicator light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the high beam indicator light bulb and socket OK?
V
YES NO 4
Replace the high beam indicator light bulb , socket or both.
High beam indicator light
Positive tester probe -> yellow (4)
Negative tester probe -» black/green
Meter assembly coupler
DC20V Fn
B G/W 1 Br
©
B/G Lg G 1
1
n Ch Dg Y
©
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Start the engine.
• Set the dimmer switch to %0 ” or %0 ”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of yellow © (green (2) ) on the headlight coupler and y e l l o w © on the meter assembly coupler(wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
8-30
YES
V
This circuit is OK.
NO
*
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the headlight coupler or meter assembly coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
LIGHTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00789
2. The meter light fails to come on.
1. Meter light bulb and socket
• Check the meter light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the meter light bulb and socket OK?
V
YES NO 4
Replace the meter light bulb, socket or both.
2. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter light coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -» brown ©
Negative tester probe -* black (2)
8-31
®
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown (T) on the meter light coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES
V
This circuit is OK.
NO
*
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the meter light coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
3. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
ECU coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -> black/green ©
Negative tester probe -> black/white (§)
LIGHTING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00790
3. The tail/brake light fails to come on.
1. Tail/brake light bulb and socket
• Check the tail/brake light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the tail/brake light bulb and socket OK?
©
V
YES NO 4
Replace the tail/brake light bulb, socket or both.
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of black/ green © on the ECU coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES
V
This circuit is OK.
NO I
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
ECU coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
2. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the tail/brake light coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -> blue ©
Negative tester probe -» black
©
8-32
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of blue © on the tail/brake light coupler (tail/brake light side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES
V
This circuit is OK.
NO 4 wiring circuit from the main switch to the tail/ brake light coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
EAS00792
4. The license plate light fails to come on.
1 . License plate light bulb and socket
• Check the license plate light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the license plate light bulb and socket
OK?
V
YES NO
*
Replace the license plate light bulb, socket or both.
2. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the license plate light coupler (license plate light side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -> blue ©
Negative tester probe -> black
LIGHTING SYSTEM
L
© n<^^>n
®
T
B
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of blue © on the license plate light coupler (license plate light side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES NO
V
4
This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit from the main switch to the license plate light coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
8-33
EAS00793
SIGNALING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
- H "
^<^
^ ^
W
B/R
L/B
Or/B
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
(D
(3D
Main fuse
Battery
ECU
Main switch
Fuel pump
Horn switch
Turn signal switch
Tail/brake light
Front brake light switch
Rear brake light switch
Horn
Turn signal relay
Front turn signal light(left)
Front turn signal light(right)
Fuel level meter
Engine trouble warning
Coolant temperatu light
Speed sensor
Turn signal indicator light
FI diagnostic tool(optional)
Rear turn signal light(left)
Rear turn signal light(right) m
C D
- O it
8-34
EAS00794
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Any of the following fail to light: turn signal light, brake light or an indicator light.
• The horn fails to sound.
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EAS00739
2. Battery
• Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
Check:
1 . main fuse
2. battery
3. main switch
4. wiring connections
(of the entire signaling system)
II Minimum open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the battery OK?
NOTE:
8 Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1 . battery cover/front cover
2. side cover(left and right)
3. front fork upper cover
4. front fork cover(left and right)
5. leg shield1,2
6. footrest board
8 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
V
YES
4
NO
• Clean the battery terminals.
• Recharge or replace the battery.
EAS00749
3. Main switch
• Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the main switch OK?
P* Pocket tester
90890-03112
YU-03112-C
V
YES NO 4
Replace the main switch.
EAS00738
1 . Main fuse
• Check the main fuse for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” in chapter 3.
• Is the fuse OK?
YES
V
NO
*
Replace the fuse.
EAS00795
4. Wiring
• Check the entire signal system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
• Is the signaling system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
YES
V
Check the condition of each of the signaling system’s circuits.
Refer to “CHECK-
ING THE SIG-
NALING SYS-
TEM”.
NO 4
Properly connect or repair the signaling system’s wiring.
8-35
EAS00796
CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM
1. The horn fails to sound.
1 . Horn switch
• Check the horn switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the horn switch OK?
V
YES NO
*
Replace the left handlebar switch.
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
3. Horn
• Disconnect the pink connector at the horn terminal.
• Connect a jumper lead © to the horn terminal and ground the jumper lead.
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Push the horn switch.
• Does the horn sound?
T
Br
-©
2. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the horn connector at the horn terminal as shown.
Positive tester probe -» brown ©
Negative tester probe -> ground
X €>
w
& s.
Br P
V L J.
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Push the horn switch.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown at the horn terminal.
• Is the voltage within specification?
V
YES NO 4
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the horn connector is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
I NO YES
V
The horn is OK.
4. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the horn connector at the pink terminal as shown.
Positive tester probe -» pink ©
Negative tester probe -> ground r r
Br P
L J
© to)
X
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of pink © at the horn terminal.
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES
V
4 NO
Repair or replace the horn.
Replace the horn.
8-36
EAS00798
2. The tail/brake light fails to come on.
1 . Tail/brake light bulb and socket
• Check the tail/brake light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the tail/brake light bulb and socket OK?
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
3. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the tail/brake light coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe
Negative tester probe green/ yellow 1 black 2
V
YES NO I
Replace the tail/brake light bulb, socket or both.
J®
E
G/Y
L
B
®
2. Brake light switches
• Check the brake light switches for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the brake light switch OK?
NO
V
YES
Replace the brake light switch(es).
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Pull in the brake levers.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of green/ yellow © on the tail/brake light coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES NO
V
4
This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit from the main switch to the tail/brake light coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
8-37
EAS00799
3. The turn signal light, turn signal indicator light or both fail to blink.
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
4. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the turn signal relay coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
1 . Turn signal indicator light bulb and socket
• Check the turn signal indicator light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the turn signal indicator light bulb and socket OK?
Positive tester probe -» brown ©
Negative tester probe -> ground
V
YES NO
*
Replace the turn signal indicator light bulb, socket or both.
2. Turn signal light bulb and socket
• Check the turn signal light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the turn signal light bulb and socket OK?
V
YES NO 4
Replace the turn signal light bulb, socket or both.
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) on brown
© at the turn signal relay coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
V
YES NO I
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the turn signal relay coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
3. Turn signal switch
• Check the turn signal switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”
• Is the turn signal switch OK?
V
YES NO
*
Replace the left handlebar switch.
8-38
5. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the turn signal relay coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
SIGNALING SYSTEM
6. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the turn signal light connector or meter assembly coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -* brown/white ©
Negative tester probe -> ground
ALeft turn signal light(front and rear)
BRight turn signal light(front and rear)
CTurn signal indicator light
A
Left turn signal light
Positive tester probe -
Negative tester probe
Right turn signal light
Positive tester probe -
Negative tester probe
B chocolate 1 ground dark green 2 ground
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) on brown/ white ® at the turn signal relay coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
V
YES NO I
The turn signal relay is faulty and must be replaced.
C
JJ B Ch [L
E -
-*- —,
\ B | Ch \
Ch
Dg
Y
JJ B | Dg [L
\ u
©
Ch
-JS)
Y w v w
(D
8-39
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Set the turn signal switch to “ <^=i ” or “ i=£> ”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of the chocolate ® or dark green (2) at the turn signal light connector (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
YES NO
V *
This circuit is OK. The wiring circuit from the turn signal switch to the turn signal light connector is faulty and must be repaired.
EAS00804
4. The fuel level meter fails to operate.
1 . Fuel sender
• Remove the fuel pump from the fuel tank.
• Connect the pocket tester ( Q x 1) to the fuel sender coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
2. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter light coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -> brown ©
Negative tester probe -> black
Positive tester probe -> green ©
Negative tester probe -> black
DC20V
1
©
CD
^ n
Br G g
G/W Lg -
B B/G d)
G Br
Lg G/W
B/G B
• Measure the fuel sender resistances. if
Fuel sender resistance (up position
“F”)( × 1)
4~10 at 20°C (68°F)
Fuel sender resistance (down position “E”)( × 10)
90~100 at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the fuel sender OK?
YES
V
NO 4
Replace the fuel pump.
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown (T) on the meter light coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
V
YES NO 4
Check the wiring connections of the entire signaling system.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
8-40
3. Fuel level meter
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Move the float u p ® or down (2) .
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
• Check that the fuel level meter needle moves to “F” or “E”.
NOTE:
Before reading the fuel level meter, leave the float in one position (either up or down) for at least three minutes.
• Does the fuel level meter needle move appropriately?
YES
V
This circuit is OK.
4 NO
Replace the speedo meter.
8-41
EAS00807
COOLING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
COOLING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
Y
Br/W
L
X
B/L
<
Y
B/L x
I ! -H •
8-42
EAS00808
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The coolant temperature indicator light fails to indicate.
• The coolant temperature indicator light fails to indicate when the engine is warm.
COOLING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
EAS00739
2. Battery
• Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
II Minimum open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20°C (68°F)
• Is the battery OK?
Check:
1 . main fuse
2. battery
3. main switch
4. coolant temperature sensor
5. wiring connections
(the entire cooling system)
NOTE:
8 Before troubleshooting, remove the follow-
1.
2.
3. ing part(s): battery cover/front cover side cover(right) front fork upper cover
4.
5. front fork cover(left and right) leg shield1,2
6. footrest board
8 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
V
YES
4
NO
• Clean the battery terminals.
• Recharge or replace the battery.
EAS00749
3. Main switch
• Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
• Is the main switch OK?
V
YES NO 4
Replace the main switch.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
YU-03112-C
EAS00738
1 . Main fuse
• Check the fuse for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” in chapter 3.
• Is the fuse OK?
V
YES NO 4
Replace the fuse.
8-43
EAS00812
4. Coolant temperature sensor
Remove the coolant temperature sensor from the cylinder head.
Connect the pocket tester ( × 1k ) to the coolant temperature sensor 1 as shown.
Immerse the coolant temperature sensor in a container filled with coolant2.
NOTE:
Make sure the coolant temperature sensor terminals do not get wet.
COOLING SYSTEM
ELEC +1 I
Coolant temperature sensor
22 Nm (2.2 m • kg, 15.9 ft • lb)
• Does the coolant temperature sensor operate properly?
V
YES NO
Replace the coolant temperature sensor.
• Place a thermometer ® in the coolant.
• Slowly heat the coolant, and then let it cool to the specified temperature indicated in the table.
• Check the thermo switch for continuity at the temperatures indicated below.
EAS00813
5. Wiring
• Check the entire cooling system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
• Is the cooling system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
YES NO
V #
Replace the ECU. Properly connect or repair the cooling system’s wiring.
Bj Coolant temperature sensor resistance
20°C (68°F): 2.32 ~2.59k
80°C (176°F): 0.310 ~0.326k r?ViW:WLVel
• Handle the coolant temperature sensor with special care.
• Never subject the coolant temperature sensor to strong shocks. If the coolant temperature sensor is dropped, replace it.
8-44
CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM
1. The coolant temperature indicator light fails to come on.
1. Coolant temperature indicator light bulb and socket
• Check the coolant temperature indicator light bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
• Are the coolant temperature indicator light bulb and socket OK?
COOLING SYSTEM
3. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter light coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -> green/red ©
Negative tester probe -» ground
V
YES NO I
Replace the coolant temperature indicator light bulb, socket or both.
2. Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter light coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Positive tester probe -> brown ©
Negative tester probe -» green/white (D
©
K
Br
,—t.G/W
G
Lg
B/ G
®
G Br
Lg G/W
B/ G B
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12V) of green/ red © on the coolant temperature sensor coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage with in specification?
V
YES NO 4
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the coolant temperature sensor coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM”.
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
• Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown 1 on the meter light coupler (wire harness side).
• Is the voltage within specification?
V
YES NO I
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the meter light coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
8-45
4. Coolant temperature indicator light
• Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor coupler at the coolant temperature sensor.
• Connect the green/red ® and black/blue ® with a jumper lead ® .
• Set the main switch to “ON”.
COOLING SYSTEM
ELEC +i
1 2
^
• Is the coolant temperature indicator light OK?
YES
V
This circuit is OK.
NO
*
Replace the coolant temperature indicator light.
8-46
TRBL Q
SHTGl •
CHAPTER 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING 9-1
ENGINE 9-1
FUEL SYSTEM 9-1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9-1
STARTING FAILURES/HARD STARTING/ INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING
SPEED 9-2
ENGINE 9-2
FUEL SYSTEM 9-2
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9-2
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE/FAULTY
CLUTCH 9-3
ENGINE 9-3
FUEL SYSTEM 9-3
FAULTY CLUTCH 9-3
ENGINE OPERATES BUT SCOOTER WILL NOT MOVE 9-3
CLUTCH SLIPS 9-3
POOR STARTING PERFORMANCE 9-3
POOR SPEED PERFORMANCE 9-4
OVERHEATING 9-4
ENGINE 9-4
COOLING SYSTEM 9-4
FUEL SYSTEM 9-4
CHASSIS 9-4
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9-4
COOLING SYSTEM 9-4
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE/FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS/UN-
STABLE HANDLING 9-5
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS 9-5
LEAKING OIL 9-5
MALFUNCTION 9-5
UNSTABLE HANDLING 9-5
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM 9-6
HEADLIGHT DOES NOT COME ON 9-6
HEADLIGHT BULB BURNT OUT 9-6
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON 9-6
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT BULB BURNT OUT 9-6
TRBL Q
SHTGl •
TURN SIGNAL DOES NOT COME ON 9-6
TURN SIGNAL BLINKS SLOWLY 9-6
TURN SIGNAL REMAINS LIT 9-6
TURN SIGNAL BLINKS QUICKLY 9-6
HORN DOES NOT SOUND 9-6
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING
TRBL Q
SHTGl •
EAS00845
TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:
The following guide for troubleshooting does not cover all the possible causes of trouble. It should be helpful, however, as a guide to basic troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in this manual for checks, adjustments, and replacement of parts.
STARTING FAILURE/HARD
STARTING
ENGINE
Cylinder and cylinder head
8Loose spark plug
8Loose cylinder head or cylinder
8Damaged cylinder head gasket
8Damaged cylinder gasket
8Worn or damaged cylinder
8Incorrect valve clearance
8Improperly sealed valve
8Incorrect valve-to-valve-seat contact
8Incorrect valve timing
8Faulty valve spring
8Seized valve
Throttle body
8Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
8Sucked-in air
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Battery
8Discharged battery
8Faulty battery
Fuse
8Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
8Improperly installed fuse
Piston and piston ring
8Improperly installed piston ring
8Damaged, worn or fatigued piston ring
8Seized piston ring
8Seized or damaged piston
Spark plug
8Incorrect spark plug gap
8Incorrect spark plug heat range
8Fouled spark plug
8Worn or damaged electrode
8Worn or damaged insulator
8Faulty spark plug cap
Air filter
8Improperly installed air filter
8Clogged air filter element
Crankcase and crankshaft
8Improperly assembled crankcase
8Seized crankshaft
Ignition coil
8Cracked or broken ignition coil body
8Broken or shorted primary or secondary coil
8Faulty spark plug lead
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel tank
8Empty fuel tank
8Clogged fuel tank cap breather hole
8Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
8Clogged or damaged fuel hose
Ignition system
8Faulty ECU
8Faulty crankshaft position sensor
8Broken AC magneto rotor woodruff key
Fuel pump
8Faulty fuel pump
8Improperly routed hose
Switches and wiring
8Faulty main switch
8Faulty engine stop switch
8Broken or shorted wiring
8Faulty front, rear or both brake light switches
8Faulty start switch
8Faulty sidestand switch(optional)
8Improperly grounded circuit
8Loose connections
9-1
STARTING FAILURES/HARD STARTING/
INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING SPEED
TRBL Q
SHTGl •
Starting system
8Faulty starter motor
8Faulty starter relay
8Faulty starting circuit cut-off relay
8Faulty starter clutch
EAS00847
INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING
SPEED
ENGINE
Cylinder and cylinder head
8Incorrect valve clearance
8Damaged valve train components
Air filter
8Clogged air filter element
FUEL SYSTEM
Throttle body
8Damaged or loose throttle body joint
8Improperly ISC(idle speed control) valve
8Improper throttle cable free play
8Flooded throttle body
8Faulty air induction system
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Battery
8Discharged battery
8Faulty battery
Spark plug
8Incorrect spark plug gap
8Incorrect spark plug heat range
8Fouled spark plug
8Worn or damaged electrode
8Worn or damaged insulator
8Faulty spark plug cap
Ignition coil
8Faulty spark plug lead
Ignition system
8Faulty ECU
8Faulty crankshaft position sensor
9-2
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE/ TRBL Q
FAULTY CLUTCH SHTGl •
EAS00848
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-
SPEED PERFORMANCE
EAS00853
FAULTY CLUTCH
ENGINE OPERATES BUT SCOOTER WILL
NOT MOVE
Refer to “STARTING FAILURE/HARD START-
ING”.
ENGINE
Air filter
8Clogged air filter element
V-belt
8Bent, damaged or worn V-belt
8Slipping V-belt
FUEL SYSTEM
Throttle body
8Faulty diaphragm
Primary pulley cam and primary pulley slider
8Damaged or worn primary pulley cam
8Damaged or worn primary pulley slider
Fuel pump
8Faulty fuel pump
Clutch spring(s)
8Damaged clutch spring
Transmission gears
8Damaged transmission gear
CLUTCH SLIPS
Clutch shoe springs
8Damaged, loose or worn clutch shoe spring
Clutch shoes
8Damaged or worn clutch shoe
Primary sliding sheave
8Seized primary sliding sheave
POOR STARTING PERFORMANCE
V-belt
8V-belt slips
8Oil or grease on the V-belt
Primary sliding sheave
8Faulty operation
8Worn pin groove
8Worn pin
Clutch shoes
8Bent, damaged or worn clutch shoe
9-3
FAULTY CLUTCH/OVERHEATING/OVERCOOLING
TRBL Q
SHTGl •
POOR SPEED PERFORMANCE
V-belt
8Worn V-belt
8Oil or grease on the V-belt
Hose(s) and pipe(s)
8Damaged hose
8Improperly connected hose
8Damaged pipe
8Improperly connected pipe
Primary pulley weight(s)
8Faulty operation
8Worn primary pulley weight
FUEL SYSTEM
Throttle body
8Damaged or loose throttle body joint
Primary fixed sheave
8Worn primary fixed sheave Air filter
8Clogged air filter element
Primary sliding sheave
8Worn primary sliding sheave
Secondary fixed sheave
8Worn secondary fixed sheave
CHASSIS
Brake(s)
8Dragging brake
Secondary sliding sheave
8Worn secondary sliding sheave
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Spark plug
8Incorrect spark plug gap
8Incorrect spark plug heat range
EAS00855
OVERHEATING Ignition system
8Faulty coolant temperature sensor
8Faulty ECU
ENGINE
Clogged coolant passages
8Heavy carbon buildup
EAS00856
OVERCOOLING
Engine oil
8Incorrect oil level
8Incorrect oil viscosity
8Inferior oil quality
COOLING SYSTEM
Thermostat
8Thermostat stays open
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant
8Low coolant level
Radiator
8Damaged or leaking radiator
8Faulty radiator cap
8Bent or damaged radiator fan
Water pump
8Damaged or faulty water pump
Thermostat
8Thermostat stays closed
Oil cooler
8Clogged or damaged oil cooler
9-4
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE/FAULTY FRONT
FORK LEGS/UNSTABLE HANDLING
TRBL Q
SHTGl •
EAS00859
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE
EAS00862
UNSTABLE HANDLING
Drum brake
8Worn brake shoe
8Worn or rusty brake drum
8Incorrect brake lever position
8Incorrect brake lever free play
8Incorrect brake camshaft lever position
8Incorrect brake shoe position
8Damaged or fatigued brake shoe spring
8Oil or grease on the brake shoe
8Oil or grease on the brake drum
EAS00861
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS
LEAKING OIL
8Bent, damaged or rusty inner tube
8Cracked or damaged outer tube
8Improperly installed oil seal
8Damaged oil seal lip
8Incorrect oil level (high)
8Loose damper rod assembly bolt
8Damaged damper rod assembly bolt copper washer
8Cracked or damaged cap bolt O-ring
MALFUNCTION
8Bent or damaged inner tube
8Bent or damaged outer tube
8Damaged fork spring
8Worn or damaged outer tube bushing
8Bent or damaged damper rod
8Incorrect oil viscosity
8Incorrect oil level
Handlebar
8Bent or improperly installed handlebar
Steering head components
8Improperly installed handlebar bracket
8Improperly installed lower bracket
(improperly tightened ring nut)
8Bent steering stem
8Damaged ball bearing or bearing race
Front fork leg(s)
8Uneven oil levels (both front fork legs)
8Unevenly tensioned fork spring (both front fork legs)
8Broken fork spring
8Bent or damaged inner tube
8Bent or damaged outer tube
Rear shock absorber assembly
8Faulty rear shock absorber spring
8Leaking oil
Tire(s)
8Uneven tire pressures (front and rear)
8Incorrect tire pressure
8Uneven tire wear
Wheel(s)
8Incorrect wheel balance
8Deformed cast wheel
8Damaged wheel bearing
8Bent or loose wheel axle
8Excessive wheel runout
Frame
8Bent frame
8Damaged steering head pipe
8Improperly installed bearing race
9-5
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM
TRBL Q
SHTGl •
EAS00866
TURN SIGNAL REMAINS LIT
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING
8 F a u l t y t u r n s i g n a l relay
SYSTEM 8Burnt-out turn signal bulb
HEADLIGHT DOES NOT COME ON
8Wrong headlight bulb
8Too many electrical accessories
8Hard charging
8Incorrect connection
8Improperly grounded circuit
8Poor contacts (main or light switch)
8Burnt-out headlight bulb
HEADLIGHT BULB BURNT OUT
8Wrong headlight bulb
8Faulty battery
8Faulty rectifier/regulator
8Improperly grounded circuit
8Faulty main switch
8Headlight bulb life expired
TURN SIGNAL BLINKS QUICKLY
8Incorrect turn signal bulb
8Faulty turn signal relay
8Burnt-out turn signal bulb
HORN DOES NOT SOUND
8Improperly adjusted horn
8Damaged or faulty horne=
8Faulty main switch
8Faulty horn switch
8Faulty battery
8Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
8Faulty wire harness
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON
8Wrong tail/brake light bulb
8Too many electrical accessories
8Incorrect connection
8Burnt-out tail/brake light bulb
TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT BULB BURNT OUT
8Wrong tail/brake light bulb
8Faulty battery
8Tail/brake light bulb life expired
TURN SIGNAL DOES NOT COME ON
8Faulty turn signal switch
8Faulty turn signal relay
8Burnt-out turn signal bulb
8Incorrect connection
8Damaged or faulty wire harness
8Improperly grounded circuit
8Faulty battery
8Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
TURN SIGNAL BLINKS SLOWLY
8Faulty turn signal relay
8Faulty main switch
8Faulty turn signal switch
8Incorrect turn signal bulb
8Faulty battery
9-6
©YAMAHA
YAMAHA MOTOR TAIWAN CO., LTD
XF50W WIRING DIAGRAM
•q=
» • r 0 r o ,
© X
XK • c • X e 4, Oft • »
MARK EXPLANATION
R, Br, BrW... COLOR C O D E
4
CONNECTING WITH G R D . W I R E
^ L
GRD.
• CONNECTOR MARK
(BETWEEN MAIN & SUB HARNESS)
Black Red o
White
Brown Green Yellow
Blue
O range
G ray
Brown/Blue
Red/Black
Blue/Black
Chocolate
Pink
Light green
Red/Blue
Blue/White
Black/Red
•
Dark green
•
Sky blue c
Brown/White c
Red/White
•
Blue/Yellow c
Black/White
•
Black/Yellow
C
Green/Yellow
Black/Green c
Black/Blue e
Green/White
•
Green/Red
•
Blue/ Green
9
White/Blue a
White/Red
•
Yellow/Green Pink/White
•
Orange/Black
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 8 Scooter Identification
- 8 Vehicle Identification Number
- 8 Model Label
- 9 Features
- 9 Outline Of The FI System
- 10 FI System
- 11 Important Information
- 11 Preparation For Removal And Disassembly
- 11 Replacement Parts
- 11 Gaskets, Oil Seals And O-rings
- 12 Lock Washers/Plates And Cotter Pins
- 12 Bearings And Oil Seals
- 12 Circlips
- 13 Equipment Preparation
- 14 Checking The Connections
- 15 Special Tools
- 20 General Specifications
- 21 Engine Specifications
- 31 Chassis Specifications
- 34 Electrical Specifications
- 37 Conversion Table
- 37 General Tightening Torque Specifications
- 38 Tightening Torques
- 38 Engine
- 40 Chassis
- 42 Lubrication Points And Lubricant Types
- 42 Engine
- 44 Chassis
- 45 Cooling System Diagrams
- 48 Cable Routing
- 56 Introduction
- 57 Periodic Maintenance And Minor Repair
- 57 Periodic Maintenance Chart For The Emission Control System
- 58 General Maintenance And Lubrication Chart
- 60 Cover And Panel
- 60 Side Covers And Tail/brake Light
- 62 Single Seat And Trunk
- 63 Leg Shield 1,2
- 64 Footrest Board And Inner Fender
- 65 Engine
- 65 Adjusting The Valve Clearance
- 71 Checking The Engine Idling Speed
- 72 Adjusting The Throttle Cable Free Play
- 73 Checking The Spark Plug
- 75 Checking The Ignition Timing
- 77 Measuring The Compression Pressure
- 79 Checking The Engine Oil Level
- 80 Changing The Engine Oil
- 82 Changing The Transmission Oil
- 83 Measuring The Engine Oil Pressure
- 85 Replacing The Air Filter Element
- 87 Checking The Throttle Body Joint And Intake Manifold
- 87 Checking The Fuel Hose
- 88 Checking The Breather Hoses
- 89 Checking The Exhaust System
- 90 Checking The Coolant Level
- 91 Checking The Cooling System
- 92 Changing The Coolant
- 95 Chassis
- 95 Adjusting The Front Brake
- 95 Adjusting The Rear Brake
- 96 Checking The Front And Rear Brake Shoes
- 97 Checking And Adjusting The Steering Head
- 99 Checking The Front Fork
- 100 Checking The Tires
- 103 Checking The Wheels
- 103 Checking And Lubricating The Cables
- 104 Lubricating The Levers And Pedals
- 104 Lubricating The Centerstand
- 105 Electrical System
- 105 Checking And Charging The Battery
- 111 Checking The Fuse
- 113 Replacing The Headlight Bulb
- 114 Adjusting The Headlight Beam
- 117 Front Wheel And Brake
- 118 Front Wheel
- 119 Front Brake Shoe Plate
- 120 Removing The Front Wheel
- 120 Disassembling The Brake Shoe Plate
- 121 Checking The Front Wheel
- 122 Checking The Speedometer Gear Unit
- 123 Checking The Brake
- 124 Assembling The Brake Shoe Plate
- 125 Assembling The Front Wheel
- 126 Installing The Front Wheel
- 127 Adjusting The Front Wheel Static Balance
- 129 Rear Wheel And Brake
- 130 Removing The Rear Wheel
- 130 Checking The Rear Wheel
- 131 Checking The Rear Wheel Drive Hub
- 131 Checking The Brake
- 132 Assembling The Brake Shoe Plate
- 134 Installing The Rear Wheel
- 134 Adjusting The Rear Wheel Static Balance
- 135 Front Fork
- 137 Removing The Front Fork Legs
- 137 Disassembling The Front Fork Legs
- 139 Checking The Front Fork Legs
- 140 Assembling The Front Fork Legs
- 142 Installing The Front Fork Legs
- 143 Handlebar
- 145 Removing The Handlebar
- 145 Checking The Handlebar
- 146 Installing The Handlebar
- 148 Steering Head
- 148 Handlebar Bracket And Headlight Stay Bracket
- 149 Lower Bracket
- 150 Removing The Lower Bracket
- 151 Checking The Steering Head
- 152 Installing The Steering Head
- 153 Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
- 154 Removing The Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
- 154 Checking The Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
- 155 Installing The Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
- 158 Engine Removal
- 158 Leads, Hoses And Muffler
- 160 Engine
- 161 Installing The Engine
- 162 Cylinder Head
- 164 Removing The Cylinder Head
- 166 Checking The Cylinder Head
- 167 Installing The Cylinder Head
- 170 The Rocker Arms And Camshaft
- 171 Removing The Rocker Arms And Camshaft
- 172 Checking The Camshaft
- 173 Checking The Rocker Arms And Rocker Arm Shafts
- 174 Checking The Timing Chain, Camshaft Sprocket, And Timing Chain Guides
- 175 Checking The Timing Chain Tensioner
- 176 Installing The Camshaft And Rocker Arms
- 177 Valves And Valve Springs
- 179 Removing The Valves
- 181 Checking The Valves And Valve Guides
- 183 Checking The Valve Seats
- 185 Checking The Valve Springs
- 186 Installing The Valves
- 188 Cylinder And Piston
- 189 Removing The Cylinder And Piston
- 190 Checking The Cylinder And Piston
- 192 Checking The Piston Rings
- 193 Checking The Piston Pin
- 194 Checking The Timing Chain Guide
- 194 Installing The Piston And Cylinder
- 196 Belt Drive
- 196 V-belt Case Cover
- 197 Kickstarter
- 198 Installing The Kickstarter
- 199 V-belt And Primary/Secondary Sheave
- 200 Secondary Sheave
- 201 Removing The Primary Sheave
- 201 Removing The Secondary Sheave And V-belt
- 202 Disassembling The Secondary Sheave
- 202 Checking The Clutch Shoes
- 203 Checking The V-belt
- 203 Checking The Primary Sheave
- 204 Checking The Primary Sheave Weights
- 204 Checking The Slider
- 204 Checking The Secondary Sheave
- 205 Assembling The Primary Sheave
- 206 Assembling The Secondary Sheave
- 207 Installing The Secondary Sheave, V-belt And Primary Sheave
- 210 Starter Clutch And AC Magneto
- 210 Stator Coil Assembly
- 212 Starter Clutch
- 213 Removing The AC Magneto
- 214 Removing The Starter Clutch
- 215 Checking The Starter Clutch
- 216 Installing The Starter Clutch
- 216 Installing The AC Magneto
- 218 Oil Pump
- 219 Checking The Oil Pump
- 220 Assembling The Oil Pump
- 220 Installing The Oil Pump
- 221 Transmission
- 222 Checking The Transmission
- 223 Crankshaft
- 223 Crankshaft Assembly
- 225 Disassembling The Crankcase
- 226 Removing The Crankshaft Assembly
- 226 Checking The Crankshaft And Connecting Rod
- 227 Checking The Crankcase
- 228 Checking The Timing Chain And Timing Chain Guide(intake Side)
- 228 Checking The Bearings And Oil Seals
- 228 Checking The Circlips And Washers
- 229 Installing The Crankshaft
- 229 Assembling The Crankcase
- 232 Radiator
- 233 Checking The Radiator
- 234 Installing The Radiator
- 235 Thermostat
- 236 Checking The Thermostat
- 237 Installing The Thermostat
- 238 Water Pump
- 240 Disassembling The Water Pump
- 240 Checking The Water Pump
- 241 Assembling The Water Pump
- 242 Installing The Water Pump
- 244 Fuel Injection System
- 245 Wiring Diagram
- 247 ECU's Self-Diagnostic Function
- 248 Checking For A Defective Engine Trouble Warning Light Bulb
- 248 Self-Diagnostic Fanction Table
- 250 Troubleshooting Chart
- 251 Diagnostic Mode
- 255 Troubleshooting Details
- 269 Throttle Body And Fuel Injector
- 269 Throttle Body
- 270 Fuel Injector And Fuel Hose
- 271 Fuel Tank
- 272 Removing The Fuel Hose
- 272 Removing The Fuel Pump
- 273 Checking The Throttle Body
- 274 Installing The Fuel Pump
- 274 Installing The Fuel Hose
- 275 Checking The Fuel Pump And Pressure Regulator Operation
- 275 Checking The Throttle Position Sensor
- 277 Checking The ISC (Idle Speed Control) Valve
- 278 Air Induction System
- 278 Air Injection
- 278 Air Cut-Off Valve
- 279 Air Induction System Diagrams
- 280 Air Cut-Off Valve And Air Filter Case
- 281 Checking The Air Induction System
- 283 Electrical Components
- 284 Wiring Diagram
- 286 Checking Switch Continuity
- 287 Checking The Switches
- 288 Checking The Bulbs And Bulb Sockets
- 288 Types Of Bulbs
- 289 Checking The Condition Of The Bulbs
- 290 Checking The Condition Of The Bulb Sockets
- 291 Ignition System
- 291 Circuit Diagram
- 292 Troubleshooting
- 296 Electric Starting System
- 296 Circuit Diagram
- 297 Starting Circuit Cut-off System Operation
- 298 Troubleshooting
- 302 Starter Motor
- 303 Checking The Starter Motor
- 305 Assembling The Starter Motor
- 306 Charging System
- 306 Circuit Diagram
- 307 Troubleshooting
- 309 Lighting System
- 309 Circuit Diagram
- 310 Troubleshooting
- 312 Checking The Lighting System
- 316 Signaling System
- 316 Circuit Diagram
- 317 Troubleshooting
- 318 Checking The Signaling System
- 324 Cooling System
- 324 Circuit Diagram
- 325 Troubleshooting
- 327 Checking The Cooling System
- 331 Starting Failure/Hard Starting
- 331 Engine
- 331 Fuel System
- 331 Electrical Systems
- 332 Incorrect Engine Idling Speed
- 332 Engine
- 332 Fuel System
- 332 Electrical Systems
- 333 Poor Medium-And-High-Speed Performance/Faulty Clutch
- 333 Engine
- 333 Fuel System
- 333 Faulty Clutch
- 333 Engine Operates But Scooter Will Not Move
- 333 Clutch Slips
- 333 Poor Starting Performance
- 334 Poor Speed Performance
- 334 Overheating
- 334 Engine
- 334 Cooling System
- 334 Fuel System
- 334 Chassis
- 334 Electrical Systems
- 334 Overcooling
- 334 Cooling System
- 335 Poor Braking Performance
- 335 Faulty Front Fork Legs
- 335 Leaking Oil
- 335 Malfunction
- 335 Unstable Handling
- 336 Faulty Lighting Or Signaling System
- 336 Headlight Does Not Come On
- 336 Headlight Bulb Burnt Out
- 336 Tail/brake Light Does Not Come On
- 336 Tail/brake Light Bulb Burnt Out
- 336 Turn Signal Does Not Come On
- 336 Turn Signal Blinks Slowly
- 336 Turn Signal Remains Lit
- 336 Turn Signal Blinks Quickly
- 336 Horn Does Not Sound